Cs2 Manual de Servicio Ingles

REGIUS CONSOLE
CS-2
INSTALLATION / SERVICE MANUAL
CODE NO. 0801
3RD. EDITION FEB. 2005
No. 26-2, Nishishinjuku 1-chome, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 163-0512, Japan

Precautions for CS-2 Installation & Service......................................................................... 1
1. Precautions for installing and servicing the CS-2 ........................................................................... 1
2. Precautions against electric shock ................................................................................................. 1
3. Precautions for installing the CS-2 ................................................................................................. 2
4. Checks and cautions before use of the CS-2 ................................................................................. 2
5. Precautions for handling the CS-2 LCD panel................................................................................ 2
6. Precautions for storage location and method of the CS-2 when the use is suspended ................. 3
Alert Symbol Marks ................................................................................................................ 4
Other Symbol Marks............................................................................................................... 5
Warning Notices (Signal Words)........................................................................................... 6
1. Overview
1.1 Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 CS-2 ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Bar code reader (Single-Bar code reader) (option) ........................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3 Bar code reader <Multi-Bar code reader> (option) ......................................................................... 1-3
1.2 List of Optional Licenses..................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Equipment Used ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.1 CS-2 Control Unit (Front View) ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 CS-2 Control Unit (Rear View)........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.3.3 CS-2 Operation Unit (Interior)......................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.4 CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)................................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.5 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View) ................................................................................................... 1-9
1.3.6 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View) ................................................................................................... 1-9
1.4 Functions of CS-2 ............................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.4.1 1-to-1 & n-to-m connections ......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.4.2 Post-registration (manual, auto and pre-registration [bar code registration]) ............................... 1-11
1.4.3 Job Manager (JM)......................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.4.4 Dependence relationships for n-to-m connections ....................................................................... 1-13
1.4.5 Optional Functions........................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.5 Setting the Host Name & IP Address................................................................................................ 1-15
1.5.1 Setting the Host Name (PC name) ............................................................................................... 1-15
1.5.2 Setting the IP Address .................................................................................................................. 1-15
1.6 Example of System Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-17
1.6.1 System-1 (standard 1-to-1 connection) ........................................................................................ 1-17
1.6.2 System-2 (n-to-m connection) ...................................................................................................... 1-18
1.7 Service Tool Screens........................................................................................................................ 1-20
1.7.1 Service Tool Screens.................................................................................................................... 1-20
2. Installing the CS-2

2.1 Installation Flow .................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Checks Prior to Installation ................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.1 System Condition............................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 Network Condition .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.3 CS-2 Operation Unit ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation.............................................................................................. 2-4
3. Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2

3.1 Unpacking........................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 CS-2 Control Unit............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 CS-2 Operation Unit ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Assembling ......................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Connecting Cables ........................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Attaching the up flow vent............................................................................................................... 3-3
CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

I
3.2.3 Attaching the stand for vertical installation ..................................................................................... 3-4
4. Setting Up the CS-2 Operation Unit

4.1 Setting the Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Checking the Factory Default Status .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Installing the Touch Panel Software .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume............................................................................................................. 4-7
5. Upgrading the CS-2 Program

5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM ....................................................................................................... 5-1
6. Connecting a CS-2 and REGIUS 170

6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection .......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Network Setting of REGIUS 170..................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Setting up the CS-2 ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection ...................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.1 Setting Up the REGIUS 170 ......................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.2 Setting up the Standard JM on the CS-2 ...................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.3 Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2............................................................................................ 6-44
7. Setting Up the System

7.1 Connecting a luminance meter ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Connecting to the Network ................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1 Connecting the CS-2 to a Network ................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.2 Connecting the REGIUS 170 to a Network..................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.3 Verifying the Network Connection .................................................................................................. 7-2
7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.1 Assembling and Connecting the Bar Code Reader (Single)........................................................... 7-4
7.3.2 Connecting the Bar Code Reader (multiple)................................................................................... 7-7
8.Setting Up the CS-2

8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Backing Up the Original Settings ........................................................................................................ 8-4
8.3 Setting the System Properties ............................................................................................................ 8-6
8.3.1 Setting the Facility/Device Properties ............................................................................................. 8-6
8.3.2 Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer)........................................................................... 8-7
8.3.3 Setting the System Configuration (RIS).......................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.4 Setting the appointment information ............................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.5 Setting the Initial Screen................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.6 Setting Density and Contrast Adjustment Amount........................................................................ 8-10
8.4 Setting the Printer Information .......................................................................................................... 8-12
8.5 Setting the Host Information ............................................................................................................. 8-16
8.6 Setting the RIS Information............................................................................................................... 8-22
8.6.1 Setting Patient/Study .................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.6.2 Setting the Result ......................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.7 Setting the Stamps ........................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.8 Configuring the Gateway .................................................................................................................. 8-35
8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product ........................................................................................ 8-36
8.9.1 Maker/Product Relation Table ...................................................................................................... 8-36
8.9.2 Patient Information Linkage .......................................................................................................... 8-36
9. Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit
II CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

9.1 Required Items ................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Preparation ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics ............................................................................... 9-1
9.4 Creating the Monitor LUT ................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5 Confirmation ....................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.1 Restoring test image...................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.2 Checking Gradation on the host output .......................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.3 Checking Gradation in Printer Output............................................................................................. 9-8
9.6 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)................................................................................... 9-9
10. Verifying and Backing Up Setup Data

10.1 Checking the Image.......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.1 Backing Up the Reader Set Up Data ............................................................................................ 10-6
10.2.2 Back Up of CS-2 Set Up Data ...................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.3 Deleting the Image Data ............................................................................................................... 10-9
11. Adjustment of Cassette Readers

11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size ........................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Checking Image Size, Read Start Position................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Adjusting PLL, Read Start Position............................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette................................................................................... 11-6
11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette....................................................................................... 11-9
12. Maintenance & Adjustment

12.1 Regular Service Items ...................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.1 Back Up of System Information .................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.2 Restore of System Information ..................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information .............................................................................................. 12-6
12.3.1 Back Up of System Information .................................................................................................... 12-6
12.3.2 Restore of JM Information ............................................................................................................ 12-7
12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2......................................................................................................... 12-8
12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170 .......................................................................................... 12-11
12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit ........................................................................... 12-15
12.6.1 Adjusting the Brightness ............................................................................................................. 12-15
12.7 Calibrating the Touch Panel ........................................................................................................... 12-16
12.7.1 Calibration................................................................................................................................... 12-16
12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM ..................................................................................... 12-17
12.8.1 Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM................................................................................. 12-17
12.8.2 Switch Over to Standard JM ....................................................................................................... 12-19
13. Disassembly & Assembly

13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and Connector ........................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Removing the Cover ......................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Component ....................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3.1 Component Position .................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3.2 Access to System Board Components and Drive........................................................................ 13-2
13.4 Identifying System Board Parts ........................................................................................................ 13-4
13.5 Attaching Memory............................................................................................................................. 13-5
13.5.1 Attaching DIMM ........................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.6 Replacing the Battery ....................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive ....................................................................................... 13-7

III
13.8 Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD Optical Disk Drive .......................................... 13-8
13.9 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................ 13-9
13.10 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive .................................................................................. 13-10
13.11 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive ........................................................................................ 13-11
13.12 Connecting IDE Drive .................................................................................................................... 13-12
14. Troubleshooting
14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application ............................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.1 Errors relating to hardware and software...................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Errors relating to communication (Viewer/Server/Printer/External patient/Examination DB)........ 14-2
14.1.3 Error relating to output queue control ........................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.4 External patient/Examination DB-related error ............................................................................. 14-3
14.1.5 Errors relating to reading ............................................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.6 Errors relating to REGIUS 170 ..................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.7 Errors relating to printer ................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.2 Collecting the Logs ........................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.1 Collecting the Application Logs..................................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.2 .........................................................................................................Collecting the System Logs14-10
14.2.3 Collecting the Reader Logs ........................................................................................................ 14-12
14.2.4 Back Up of JM Logs.................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)........................................................................ 14-19
15. Service Tool Screens

15.1 Service Tool Overview ...................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.1 Alternative of Starting the Service Tool ........................................................................................ 15-1
15.1.2 Summary of the Service Tool Screens ......................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...] ................................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1 “General Setup” Common Screen ................................................................................................ 15-5
15.2.2 “General Setup” Screen ・ General ............................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics] ...
15-7
15.3.1 “QA Tool Column Edit” Screen ..................................................................................................... 15-7
15.3.2 Configure Tool .............................................................................................................................. 15-8
15.3.3 “Study List (Column Heading)” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.4 Image Confirmation screen Editing Tool screen......................................................................... 15-12
15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]............................................................................................................... 15-14
15.4.1 “SYSTEM INFO” Screen............................................................................................................. 15-14
15.4.2 “SYSTEM INFO • Institution Info.” Screen .................................................................................. 15-14
15.4.3 “SYSTEM INFO • REGIUS Info.” Screen.................................................................................... 15-15
15.4.4 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Reader)” Screen .............................................................................. 15-16
15.4.5 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Host, Printer)” Screen ...................................................................... 15-17
15.4.6 “SYSTEM INFO • System (RIS)” Screen .................................................................................... 15-18
15.4.7 “SYSTEM INFO • (Option)” Screen ............................................................................................ 15-19
15.4.8 “SYSTEM INFO • Order Info.” Screen ........................................................................................ 15-20
15.4.9 “SYSTEM INFO • Study Info.” Screen ........................................................................................ 15-21
15.4.10 “SYSTEM INFO • Timeout” Screen ............................................................................................ 15-22
15.4.11 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <User>” Screen............................................................................. 15-23
15.4.12 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <Service>” Screen ........................................................................ 15-24
15.4.13 “SYSTEM INFO • Output Priority” Screen .................................................................................. 15-25
15.4.14 “SYSTEM INFO • Log Level “ Screen......................................................................................... 15-26
15.4.15 “SYSTEM INFO • My Network” Screen ...................................................................................... 15-27
15.4.16 “SYSTEM INFO • HIPAA” Screen............................................................................................... 15-28
15.4.17 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Filliping Mark” display .................................................................................... 15-29
15.4.18 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Remote Maintenance” display ....................................................................... 15-30
15.4.19 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Image Sharing” display.................................................................................. 15-31
15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager].............................................................................................................. 15-32
15.5.1 “JOBM INFO • Job Manager Info.” Screen ................................................................................. 15-32
IV CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.5.2 “JOBM INFO • Back to Standard” Screen .................................................................................. 15-33
15.6 [Console] > [Printer] ........................................................................................................................ 15-34
15.6.1 Common Display of “PRINTER INFO” Screen ........................................................................... 15-34
15.6.2 “PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen........................................................................................ 15-34
15.6.3 “PRINTER INFO • Basic TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................................... 15-35
15.6.4 "PRINTER INFO • Basic DICOM” Screen .................................................................................. 15-36
15.6.5 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen............................................................ 15-37
15.6.6 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen ........................................................... 15-38
15.6.7 “PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen ............................................................................. 15-39
15.6.8 “PRINTER INFO • Output Size” Screen ..................................................................................... 15-40
15.6.9 “PRINTER INFO• Image” Screen ............................................................................................... 15-41
15.6.10 “PRINTER INFO • Output Setting” Screen ................................................................................. 15-42
15.6.11 “PRINTER INFO • Printer“ Screen.............................................................................................. 15-43
15.6.12 “PRINTER INFO • Output Pixel” Screen..................................................................................... 15-44
15.7 [Console] > [Host] ........................................................................................................................... 15-45
15.7.1 Common Settings of “HOST INFO” Screen................................................................................ 15-45
15.7.2 “HOST INFO • Command” Screen ............................................................................................. 15-45
15.7.3 “HOST INFO • C-STORE TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................................. 15-46
15.7.4 “HOST INFO • C-STORE DICOM” Screen ................................................................................. 15-47
15.7.5 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION TCP/IP” Scree .................................................................................. 15-48
15.7.6 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION DICOM” Screen................................................................................ 15-49
15.7.7 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen ................................................................. 15-50
15.7.8 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen ................................................................. 15-51
15.7.9 “HOST INFO • Image” Screen .................................................................................................... 15-52
15.7.10 “HOST INFO • Output Setting” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-53
15.7.11 “HOST INFO ・ Output Pixel” screen........................................................................................... 15-54
15.8 [Console] > [RIS] ............................................................................................................................ 15-55
15.8.1 Common Settings of “RIS INFO” Screen.................................................................................... 15-55
15.8.2 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen ................................................................................................. 15-55
15.8.3 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (Patient/Study).............................................................................. 15-56
15.8.4 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (Patient/Study) ............................................................................. 15-57
15.8.5 ”RIS INFO • Detached” Screen................................................................................................... 15-58
15.8.6 “RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-59
15.8.7 “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” Screen......................................................................... 15-61
15.8.8 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen (Result) .................................................................................... 15-62
15.8.9 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (result) .......................................................................................... 15-63
15.8.10 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (result) .......................................................................................... 15-64
15.8.11 “RIS INFO • Detached” Screen (result) ...................................................................................... 15-65
15.8.12 “RIS INFO • MPPS” Screen (result)............................................................................................ 15-66
15.9 [Console] > [Density] ...................................................................................................................... 15-67
15.9.1 Common Settings of “MARKER INFO” Screen .......................................................................... 15-67
15.9.2 “MARKER INFO • Overlay Set” Screen ..................................................................................... 15-67
15.9.3 “MARKER INFO • Stamp Position” Screen ................................................................................ 15-68
15.10 [Console] > [Stamp] ........................................................................................................................ 15-69
15.10.1 “Stamp Infomation” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-69
15.10.2 “Stamp Format” Screen .............................................................................................................. 15-70
15.10.3 “Set Stamp” Screen .................................................................................................................... 15-71
15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag] .................................................................................................................. 15-75
15.11.1 "Exam Tag Setup” Screen .......................................................................................................... 15-75
15.11.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/4) ......................................................................................................... 15-77
15.11.3 “Output Device Information” Screen ........................................................................................... 15-78
15.11.4 “Study Parts Select” Screen ....................................................................................................... 15-79
15.11.7 “Process Select” Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-81
15.11.8 Detail Setup screen (4/4) ............................................................................................................ 15-82
15.12 [Console] > [Process] ..................................................................................................................... 15-83
15.12.1 “Process Parameter Setup” Screen............................................................................................ 15-83

V
15.12.6 “Detailed Setting” Screen (5/5) ................................................................................................... 15-88
15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway] ................................................................................................................... 15-89
15.13.1 Gateway to Others main menu screen ....................................................................................... 15-89
15.13.2 MWM Controller Setting screen................................................................................................. 15-90
15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB] ................................................................................................................. 15-92
15.14.1 “Patient DB Import” Screen......................................................................................................... 15-92
15.14.2 “Patient Data Base” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-93
15.14.3 “OK (Test Data Base)” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-94
15.14.4 “Export Patient DB” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-95
15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]]............................................................................................... 15-96
15.15.1 “Install File” Screen..................................................................................................................... 15-96
15.15.2 “Control Program” Screen........................................................................................................... 15-96
15.16 [Console] > [License] ...................................................................................................................... 15-97
15.16.1 License Manager screen ............................................................................................................ 15-97
15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”..................................................................................... 15-98
15.17.1 Common Displays of “CCU INFO” Screen ................................................................................. 15-98
15.17.2 “CCU INFO • TCP/IP” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-98
15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup]............................................................................................................... 15-99
15.18.1 “Device Set” Screen.................................................................................................................... 15-99
15.19 [Reader] > [PCB]........................................................................................................................... 15-101
15.19.1 “REGIUS 170 PCB” Screen...................................................................................................... 15-101
15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current]................................................................................................................ 15-102
15.20.1 “Std. Current” Screen................................................................................................................ 15-102
15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.] ............................................................................................................. 15-103
15.21.1 “Uniformity Corr.” Screen.......................................................................................................... 15-103
15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity].................................................................................................................. 15-105
15.22.1 “Sensitivity Corr.” Screen.......................................................................................................... 15-105
15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs]................................................................................................................... 15-107
15.23.1 “SubSystemLogs Create” Screen............................................................................................ 15-107
15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs] ............................................................................................................. 15-108
15.24.1 Common Displays of “Reader Log Info.” Screen ...................................................................... 15-108
15.24.2 “Reader Log Info.” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-108
15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade] ............................................................................................... 15-109
15.25.1 “Install File” Screen................................................................................................................... 15-109
15.25.2 “Reader Program (change)” Screen ......................................................................................... 15-109
15.26 [Reader] > [Network]..................................................................................................................... 15-110
15.26.1 “Network” screen ...................................................................................................................... 15-110
15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]............................................................................................. 15-111
15.27.1 “System Setup File Save” Screen........................................................................................... 15-111
15.27.2 “Image File Save” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-112
15.27.3 Log Manager screen................................................................................................................. 15-113
15.27.4 “Log File Save” Screen ............................................................................................................. 15-114
15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image] ....................................................................................................... 15-115
15.28.1 “System Setup File Restore” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-115
15.28.2 “Image File Restore” Screen.................................................................................................... 15-116
15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]................................................................................... 15-117
15.29.1 “Brightness” Screen .................................................................................................................. 15-117
15.29.2 “Brightness • Prop. Measure” Screen ....................................................................................... 15-118
15.29.3 “Bright. Adjustment• LUT making for the display” Screen......................................................... 15-119
15.29.4 “Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen............................................................................ 15-120
15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All] ................................................................................... 15-122
15.30.1 “Delete Image” Screen.............................................................................................................. 15-122
15.30.2 “Delete All” Dialogue................................................................................................................. 15-123
15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]................................................. 15-124
15.31.1 “PostgreSQL access” Screen ................................................................................................... 15-124
15.31.2 Back Up of JM Information ....................................................................................................... 15-127
VI CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15.31.3 Restore of JM Information ........................................................................................................ 15-127
15.31.4 JM Log Save............................................................................................................................. 15-128
15.31.5 JM Initialize ............................................................................................................................... 15-128
15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping].......................................................................................................................... 15-129
15.32.1 “Network Diagnosis” Screen ..................................................................................................... 15-129
15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool) ................................................................................................... 15-130
15.33.1 “Mainte” Screen ........................................................................................................................ 15-130
15.33.2 “Contrast” Screen ..................................................................................................................... 15-132
15.33.3 “ROI” Screen............................................................................................................................. 15-133
15.33.4 “Histogram” Screen................................................................................................................... 15-133
15.33.5 “Hor. & Ver. Profile” Screen ...................................................................................................... 15-134
15.33.6 “MTF Measurement” Screen..................................................................................................... 15-135
15.33.7 “Measure: S Sensitivity Measure” Screen ................................................................................ 15-136
15.33.8 “Measure: Corrected Mural Measure” Screen .......................................................................... 15-137
15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log] .................................................................................................. 15-138
15.34.1 “Application Log” Screen .......................................................................................................... 15-138
15.34.2 “Search” Screen........................................................................................................................ 15-139
15.34.3 “System Log Info.” Screen ........................................................................................................ 15-140
16. Appendix
16.1 List of Differences ............................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.1 Service Tool.................................................................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2 Function ........................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.2 Stamp Item Selection List ................................................................................................................. 16-6
16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table ...................................................................................... 16-8

VII
VIII CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02
PRECAUTIONS FOR CS-2 INSTALLATION & SERVICE
Observe the precautions below before starting installation or maintenance service.
1. Precautions for installing and servicing the CS-2

• Only properly trained and authorized service personnel can install and service the CS-2 in order to
prevent risk of injury.
• When servicing the CS-2, which may cause vibration to the device, wait for 30 seconds or more after the
shutdown to start servicing.
• When an access close to the moving parts, such as fan is required in servicing, take great precautions not
to get injured from the part of body or clothes being caught by the fan.
• The electric circuit in the CS-2 may be damaged by static electricity. The main body and any electrical
parts removed should be handled with due care during servicing. An anti-static wristband should always
be worn when handling circuit boards.
• Before removing or replacing internal circuit boards, or disconnecting connectors or cables, the CS-2
power supply must be switched off.
• Carrying out the disassembling or assembling with the power on will result in serious injury and must
always be avoided.
• Operation and adjustment of the device in a way other than described in this manual may cause emission
of hazardous electromagnetic waves and must always avoided.
• Follow the description in the caution labels to ensure servicing is performed appropriately and safely.
• Do not allow the user to remove the outer covers of the device.
2. Precautions against electric shock

• Precautions against high voltage
The CS-2 contains a high voltage power supply. Observe the following precautions to avoid electric
shock. Touching the high voltage supply parts of the device after removing covers may cause electric
shock.
• Precautions against power supply

Maximum 100VAC is supplied to the devices that compose the CS-2. Observe the following precautions
to avoid electric shock.
• Install the devices in a place where they are not exposed to water.
• Check that the devices are well grounded.
• Make sure that all the cables are connected correctly and are not damaged

1
3. Precautions for installing the CS-2
• Install the CS-2 in a place where it is not exposed to water.
• Store in the location where there is no likelihood of being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, airflow, direct sunlight, air containing dust, salt or sulfur, etc.
• Do not install the CS-2 directly on the floor.
• Store in a flat place where it is free from vibration or shock.
• Do not store in a place for chemical storage or in a place where a gas may evolve.
• Do not use any power outlet other than that whose voltage and frequency complies with the specification
of the CS-2.
• Use the power outlet that has a well sufficient electric capacity to match the power consumption of the
CS-2.
• Power cable and communication cable shall be connected to the CS-2 to operate. Lay the cables neatly to
avoid to trip over and to accidentally disconnect them.
• Make sure that the power cable is properly plugged in the power outlet that has an independent
grounding. In case if the power outlet has no independent grounding terminal, use an additional grounding
terminal and secure the connection.
• CS-2 has an air inlet and outlet in order to prevent the temperature from rising in the device. Do not block
the air inlet and outlet.
• Installing the CS-2 close to the device that is not complying with EMC, it may cause malfunction.
• Do not install the CS-2 in the environment where the patient can easily access the device.
4. Checks and cautions before use of the CS-2

• Check if the power cable is not damaged.
• Check if the earth cable is properly connected.
• Check if all the cables are connected correctly and not loose.
• Check if there is no fracture or crack on the LCD of the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• Check if the CS-2 operates stably and without failure.
5. Precautions for handling the CS-2 LCD panel

• Operate the touch panel of the CS-2 Operation Unit with fingers. Do not use a sharp-pointed object, such
as a pen, as it will crack or damage the touch panel. Because the LCD is made of glass, do not apply a
physical force to the LCD.
• If the touch panel is broken, and the liquid inside it is leaked, do not put it into your mouth. If the liquid is
put on the part of your body or clothes, immediately wash it off in soapy water.
• If cracking or breakage occurs on the touch panel, immediately stop using it. Never use it when the touch
panel is damaged.
2 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

6. Precautions for storage location and method of the CS-2 when the use is suspended
• Turn the power OFF in the specified procedure.
• When disconnecting cables, hold the cables correctly to remove them.
• Observe the following precautions for storage location.
• Store in the location where the unit will not be exposed to water.
• Store in the location where there is no likelihood of being adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, airflow, direct sunlight, air containing dust, salt or sulfur, etc.
• Store in a flat place where it is free from vibration or shock.
• Do not store in a place for chemical storage or in a place where a gas may evolve.
• Keep all accessories, cables, etc., neatly in the storage location after cleaning them.
• Be sure to clean them not to cause any trouble when it is used for the next time.
7. Precautions in operating the CS-2 after an extended period of non-use

• Check if there is no damage on the power cable.
• Make sure that the device well grounded.
• Make sure that all the cables are connected correctly and firmly.
• Check if there is no fracture or crack on the LCD of the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• Check if the CS-2 operates stably and without failure.
• Using the device with other X-ray device at the same time may result in an incorrect diagnosis or
hazardous to people. So, extreme care should be taken.
8. Ethernet Port
• Do not connect other cable than Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port.
• Do not use the Ethernet port for the connection to the telephone line.
9. Precautions when disposing of the product and packing materials.

When disposing of the product and packing materials, follow the local ordinance and regulations and request
the authorized industrial waste disposal operator.
10. About the device names listed in this manual.

The reader name “REGIUS 170” or “REGIUS 190” in this manual means both “REGIUS 170” and “REGIUS
190” when the paragraph or the procedure is common to both readers.

3
ALERT SYMBOL MARKS
Safety Alert Symbol

This is the industry "Safety Alert Symbol". This symbol draws your attention to items and operations
associated with the use of this equipment that could result in danger to yourself and others.
Please read all messages next to alert symbol marks, and follow the directions very carefully.
Before assembling or using this equipment, it is important that you read the instructions and safety
standards.

OTHER SYMBOL MARKS
The following table defines the symbol marks used on the equipment and in this manual.
No. Symbol Meaning of Symbol
1 Danger, Warning or Note.

Read the description that bears this symbol.
2 Compulsory symbol.
Must observe the instruction.
3 Alternating current
4 Protective earth (ground)
5 OFF (power: disconnection from the mains)
6 ON (power: connection to the mains)
7 Standby ON/OFF (The main power source will still be ON even when
this is turned OFF.)
8 Dangerous voltage. (Indicates that high voltage is used.)

5
WARNING NOTICES (SIGNAL WORDS)
• Signal words provide an indication of the degree of danger concealed within the product.
• This manual uses three different signal words depending on the probability and severity of injury or damage
as explained below.
DANGER Indicates an acute hazard that will result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
WARNING Indicates a danger that may result in death or serious injury if not avoided.
CAUTION Indicates a danger that may result in medium-level wound or minor injury if not avoided.
It is also used to indicate anticipation of a danger of physical damage only.
Probability of damage
High Low
Bodily injury and Death or serious injury DANGER WARNING

(damage to (serious damage)
equipment)
Medium-level wound or WARNING or CAUTION CAUTION
minor injury (minor
damage)
Physical damage only CAUTION

1 Overview
This page intentionally left blank.
1.1 Specifications
1.1 Specifications
1.1.1 CS-2
Product Name REGIUS Console CS-2

Code no. 0801
Image processing Automatic gray-scale processing, frequency processing,equalization
processing, hybrid processing
Memory for Image Storage 20 GB or more
I/O Port Ethernet 10base-T/100baseTX/1000base-T (Standard X 1))
Image Output
Host Normal 1ch, Backup 1ch

Printer Normal 1ch, Backup 1ch
DICOM support Storage(CR/DX, SCU), Basic Grayscale Print Management SCU, Modality
Worklist Management SCU, Modality Performed Procedure Step SCU
Operational Condition 15 ~ 30°C/40 ~ 80RH% (no condensation)

Transport/Storage Condition −40 ∼ 60°C/5 ∼ 100ΡΗ% (no condensation)
Accessories Control Unit power cable, Operation unit power cable, Control Unit/
Operation Unitconnecting cable (several), Keyboard, Mouse x 1,
Operation manual
Option Barcode reader for cassette registration (single/multi), CS-2 MWM/
FTP/DETATCH Option, CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option, CS-2 HQ
Mammography Option, CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1, CS-2
DICOM Output Additional #2, CS-2 DICOM Output Package, CS-2
Stitching Option, CS-2 Image Sharing Option, CS-2 Data Analysis
Option

1-1
1.1 Specifications
1.1.2 Bar code reader (Single-Bar code reader) (option)
Bar code reader unit

Product name BH2104 - K01
Interface USB Ver. 1.1
Light source Visible Laser Diode 650nm
Laser class Conforms to CDRH Class II
Readable code Code 128
Maximum read distance 190 mm
Minimum resolution 0.13 mm
Dead Zone +/- 6 degrees of beam axis.
Power supply voltage 4.5 ~ 5.5 VDC (voltage at connector)
Current consumption Normal Operation : Max. 350 mA (5.5VDC)
Ave. 130 mA
Standby : Max.50 mA
Generated Heat Max. 1.75 W
Ave. 0.65 W
Resistance to Shock Normal reading is secured even after it is dropped from 1.5m height.
(with cable, after 10 drops on the plastic tile floor at random angle)
Operating Life MTBF 240,000H (operation in 40: atmosphere)
Ambient Luminance Artificial Light : 450ft. -candles (4842 lx.)
Sunlight : 10,000ft. -candles (107,600 lx.)
Operating temperature 0 ~ 50°C
Storage temperature -40 ~ 60°C
Humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (no condensation)
Dimensions 63(W) x 84(D) x 152(H) mm
Weight 146g (without cable.)
Cable length 1.7m (with connectors)
Stand
Product name BS9019 - K01
Dimensions 151(W) x 170(D) x 250(H) mm (without projected parts)
Weight 193g
1-2 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.1 Specifications
Scanning Angle(in the case of Secu-

rity Level 2)
Ske w Angle : +/- 50 degrees Pitch Angle : +/- 30 degrees Roll Angle : +/- 15 degrees
+a
+B -B
-y +y
-a
1.1.3 Bar code reader <Multi-Bar code reader> (option)
Product name MS 7120 Orbit
Interface USB
Light Source Visible Laser Diode
Laser Class Conforms to CDRH Class IIa
Readable Code Code 128
Max. Readable Length 130mm
Resolution 0.13mm
Power Source 5.2 VDC
Current Consumption 220mA
Resistance to Shock Normal reading is secured even after it is dropped on the concrete
ground from 1.0m height.
Operating Temperature 0 ~ 40°C
Storage Temperature Conditions -40 ~ 60°C
Humidity 5 ~ 95%RH (no condensation)
Dimensions 80(W) x 105(D) x 150(H) mm
Weight 380g (without cable.)
Cable Length 2.1m (with connectors)

1-3
1.2 List of Optional Licenses
1.2 List of Optional Licenses

IMPORTANT In the following settings, only those functions for which the
license has been purchased should be set to “ON”. Never
set the function for which the license is not purchased to
“ON”.
Required license Function Product Code (Displayed on the

screen)
CS-2 MWM/FTP/DETATCH Option To acquire the patient info or exam info from
the External patient/Exam DB.
CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option To send the exam result to the External
patient/Exam DB.
CS-2 HQ Mammography Option To read the mammogram at the resolution of
43.75µm.
CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1 To output the image to two destinations.
(only either to viewer/server or printer with
the Standard License)
CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #2 To output the image to three destinations.
(essential to agreed to the CS-2 DICOM
Output Additional #1 license)
CS-2 DICOM Output Package To output the image to three destinations.
(not essential to agree to the CS-2 DICOM
Output Additional #1)
CS-2 Stitching Option To stitch images of long object read on the
REGIUS 190/170)
CS-2 Image Sharing Option To browse the exam history of other CS-2s.
CS-2 Data Analysis Option To register or output the exam-related data
that is controlled by the CS-2.

1.3 Equipment Used
1.3 Equipment Used

1.3.1 CS-2 Control Unit (Front View)
1. CD-RW drive
2. Hard disk drive activity indicator
3. Power ON indicator
4. Power button
5. USB connector (x2)
6. Microphone connector (line input)
7. Head phone connector (line output)
8. Diskette drive

1-5
1.3 Equipment Used
1.3.2 CS-2 Control Unit (Rear View)
1. Power code connector

2. Cable lock latch
3. Rope clip (U-shaped bolt) hole
4. PCI adaptor slot
5. Serial connector (x2)
6. Ethernet connector
8. VGA monitor connector
9. Parallel connector
10. Audio line input connector
11. Audio line output connector (light green)
13. PS/2 keyboard connector
14. PS/2 mouse connector

1.3 Equipment Used
1.3.3 CS-2 Operation Unit (Interior)
1. Diskette drive lock

2. DIMM (memory) connector (x2)
3. Battery
4. PCI riser
5. Power supply assembly
6. CD-RW drive (the HDD is under the CD drive)
7. CD or DVD drive lock

1-7
1.3 Equipment Used
1.3.4 CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)
Control panel
1. Screen Manager
2. Speaker
Sound volume Use the left/right control button to adjust volume

Noise reduction Use the left/right control button to display the sound vol-
ume adjustment menu and hold down the up or down
control button.
To delete, press the left or right control button.
3. Input switch button

4. Auto button
5. Enter button
6. Control buttons (left/down/up/right)
7. Power switch
8. Power lamp
Blue Operation mode

Yellow flashes twice Saving mode
Yellow flashes slowly Power off

1.3 Equipment Used
1.3.5 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View)
1. Stand attachment holes

2. Anti-theft lock
3. Stand (detachable)
1.3.6 CS-2 Operation Unit (Rear View)
1. Power connector
2. USB port (upstream)
3. Audio input terminal
4. DVI-D connector (SIGNAL 1)
5. D-SUB15 pin connector (mini) (SIGNAL 2)

1-9
1.4 Functions of CS-2

CS-2 is a console newly developed for controlling the REGIUS MODEL
170 (REGIUS 170), which was created for the practitioner market.
CS-2 features intuitive and simple operation and auto-learning
capabilities for image processing parameters.
After acquiring a detailed understanding of the capabilities of CS-2, you
must be able to configure various systems for specific purposes.
1.4.1 1-to-1 & n-to-m connections

The simplest configuration is one in which the CS-2 is connected to
one REGIUS 170 and the CS-2 functions as a controller exclusively for
that device. This type of configuration is denoted as a “1-to-1”
connection in this manual.
Several 1-to-1 connections can be used on the same network.
In this case, however, unlike an n-to-m connection (described below),
the CS-2 can control only the REGIUS 170 in a 1-to-1 connection.
1-to-1 1-to-1
CS-2 #1 CS-2 #2
External patient/ Printer

exam DB Viewer/Server
REGIUS REGIUS
170 #1 170 #2
Read image
Network
On the other hand, a configuration where two CS-2 and two REGIUS
170s are connected with one network and each CS-2 shares the
REGIUS 170s is called an n-to-m connection. This includes
configurations in which one CS-2 is connected to two REGIUS 170s
and two CS-2s are connected to one REGIUS 170.
n-to-m
CS-2 #1 CS-2 #2
External patient/
Printer
exam DB
Viewer/Server
REGIUS REGIUS
170 #1 170 #2
Read image
Network
1 - 10 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

For reasons related to system characteristics, RIS/IDS and Host,

which are described as external I/O devices in the CS-1 manual, are
denoted as follows in the CS-2 manual:
• RIS/IDS → External patient/Examination DB

• Host → Viewer/Server
However, because of compatibility between the CS-2 and CS-1
Service Tools, the words "RIS/IDS" and "Host" may appear in some
tools.
1.4.2 Post-registration (manual, auto and pre-registration [bar

code registration])
1-to-1 connections Cassette images taken by a REGIUS 170 are always sent to one CS-2.
Therefore, the CS-2 defines the association between sent images and
X-rayed body parts. This is called post-registration. In addition, if X-
rayed body parts are not pre-registered, when a cassette is inserted in
the REGIUS 170 and an X-rayed part is issued it is called auto-
registration.
n-to-m connections If which image corresponds to which X-rayed part is not defined
beforehand, the image could be sent to the wrong CS-2. For that
reason, the CS-2 uses a bar code reader to read bar code information
on the cassette before X-raying (or input) and registers the X-rayed
part that is associated with the image. When the cassette is input, the
bar code read by the REGIUS 170 and the one registered by the CS-2
are compared and it is determined which image is sent to the CS-2.
This method is called pre-registration.
• The post-registration and auto-registration methods do not use the
bar code reader.
• n-to-m systems must use the pre-registration method.
• Either post-registration or auto-registration can be used with a
1-to-1 system.The default is post-registration. Depending on the
operation method in the facility, it may be switched to auto-
registration. Pre-registration is not normally used.

1 - 11
1.4.3 Job Manager (JM)

Job Manager (JM) associates the aforementioned cassette bar code
and X-rayed body parts through communication between a CS-2 and
REGIUS 170. JM is incorporated in the CS-2 and JM runs on the CS-2
and, regardless of which connection method is used (1-to-1 or n-to-m),
is an essential component of systems that include a CS-2 and REGIUS
170.
For a 1-to-1 connection, JM runs on all CS-2s.
For a n-to-m connection, the standard JM runs on one CS-2 and a
backup JM runs on other CS-2s. Normally, all CS-2s and the REGIUS
170 use the standard JM. The backup JM is used only when there is
trouble with the standard JM.
1-to-1 1-to-1 1-to-1

CS-2 #1 CS-2 #2 CS-2 #3

exam DB Viewer/
REGIUS REGIUS REGIUS Server
170 #1 170 #2 170 #3
CS-2 #1 CS-2 #2
JM Backup JM
exam DB Viewer/
REGIUS REGIUS Server
170 #1 170 #2

1.4.4 Dependence relationships for n-to-m connections

In a 1-to-1 connection, turning off the CS-2 automatically puts the
REGIUS 170 in standby.
With an n-to-m connection system, since two CS-2s share one
REGIUS 170, even if one CS-2 quits, in some cases the REGIUS 170
cannot enter standby status. To implement this, it is possible to define
the dependence relationship for power control between the CS-2s and
the REGIUS 170.
For example, as shown in the figure below, CS-2 #1 is associated with
REGIUS 170 #1 and #2 for power control, while CS-2 #2 is associated
with REGIUS 170 #2.
CS-2 #1, JM CS-2 #2, JM

Ser. no. 0025 Ser. no. 0026
REGIUS 170 REGIUS 170

#1 #2
Ser. no. 0025 Ser. no. 0025
Power ON/OFF association

Error information association
In this configuration, terminating the system software on CS-2 #1 alone

automatically places REGIUS 170 #1 in standby.
In the same way, terminating CS-2 #2 alone does not place either
REGIUS 170 in standby.
Since REGIUS 170 #2 is associated with both CS-2s, if either CS-2
starts up, it automatically becomes operating status and when both
CS-2s quit, it enters standby.
This relationship can also be used to handle error messages so that
errors that occur on a specific REGIUS 170 can be sent to a specific
CS-2. In the above example, errors that occur on REGIUS 170 #1 are
only sent to CS-2 #1 and errors that occur on REGIUS 170 #2 are only
sent to CS-2 #2.

1 - 13
1.4.5 Optional Functions

Separate license will be necessary to implement a connection or to use
the functions listed below. Check whether the license has been
purchased before implementing the connection.
• To acquire the patient info or exam info from the External patient/
Exam DB.
Required license
CS-2 MWM/FTP/DETATCH Option
• To send the exam result to the External patient/Exam DB.
Required license
CS-2 MPPS/DETATCH Option
• To read the mammogram at the resolution of 43.75µm.
Required license
CS-2 HQ Mammography Option
• To output the image to two destinations. (only either to viewer/
server or printer with the Standard License)
Required license
CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1
• To output the image to three destinations. (essential to agreed to
the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1 license)
Required license
CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #2
• To output the image to three destinations. (not essential to agree to
the CS-2 DICOM Output Additional #1)
Required license
CS-2 DICOM Output Package
• To stitch images of long object read on the REGIUS 190/170)
Required license
CS-2 Stitching Option
• To browse the exam history of other CS-2s.
Required license
CS-2 Image Sharing Option
• To register or output the exam-related data that is controlled by the
CS-2.
Required license
CS-2 Data Analysis Option

1.5 Setting the Host Name & IP Address

In TCP/IP networks, all devices connected to the network need an
individual host name (PC name) and IP address. The network IP
address and host name must be unique.
In the factory default, CS-2 uses a fixed IP address and unique host
name, as does the REGIUS 170. The CS-2 and REGIUS 170 are set
to the post-registration method by default.
If your facility does not instruct you otherwise, maintain the factory
default 1-to-1 connection.
The following is the factory default status:
CS-2 • Host name CS2-XXXX XXXX is a serial number

• IP address 192.168.20.90
• Net mask 255.255.255.0
REGIUS 170/190 • Host name r170-0001

• IP address 192.168.20.170
• Net mask 255.255.255.0
IMPORTANT “r170-0001” has been registered with the host name of

the REGIUS 190 at the factory, allowing the REGIUS 190
to be connected to the CS-2 as default.
1.5.1 Setting the Host Name (PC name)

To change the host name (PC name) of the REGIUS 170, set using the
following rules.
IMPORTANT The host name is case sensitive. Pay attention when

setting the host name.
REGIUS 170 host name Input the last 4 digits of the REGIUS 170 serial number after "r170-".
Example When the serial number of REGIUS 170 is 0456, the host name of
REGIUS 170 is:
r170-0456
REGIUS 190 host name Input the last 4 digits of the REGIUS 190 serial number after "r190-".
Example When the serial number of REGIUS 190 is 0456, the host name of
REGIUS 190 is:
r190-0456
IMPORTANT Paragraphs in the following pages are mainly describing
the REGIUS 170. When the REGIUS 190 is networked,
read “r170-” as “r190-”.
1.5.2 Setting the IP Address

To connect devices to the facility’s existing network, obtain an IP
address for each device from the network administrator beforehand.
If no IP address is specified, use the following addresses.

1 - 15
Device IP address Subnet mask

CS-2 #1 192.168.20.90 255.255.255.0
CS-2 #2 192.168.20.91 255.255.255.0
REGIUS 170 #1 192.168.20.170 255.255.255.0
REGIUS 170 #2 192.168.20.171 255.255.255.0

1.6 Example of System Configuration

A typical set up and system configuration that includes a networked
CS-2 and REGIUS 170 is shown below. Refer to this when creating a
network at your facility.
1.6.1 System-1 (standard 1-to-1 connection)

Printer
Viewer/Server
Ethernet
Hub
CS-2
Serial no. : 0225 REGIUS 170
Host name : CS2-0025 Serial no. : 0110
IP address : 192.168.20.90 Host name : r170-001
IP address : 192.168.20.170
The following example is a 1-to-1 connection with the default settings.

If there is no instruction from the facility, use the factory default settings
for both the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 and change the IP addresses for
peripheral devices connected to the network. Post-registration can be
switched to auto-registration without affecting the host name or IP
address.
Setting example CS-2
Item Setting
Host name CS2-0025
Host name registered in JM CS1-0001
IP address 192.168.20.90
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
JM Operating
Bar code registration method Post-registration / Auto-registration
REGIUS 170
Item Setting
Host name r170-0001
Host name (on Job Manager) r170-0001
IP address 192.168.20.170
IMPORTANT In the CS-2 factory default, host name CS1-0001 is

registered in the JM. The reason for this is because the
CS-2 can be connected to a REGIUS 170 in factory
default status.

1 - 17
1.6.2 System-2 (n-to-m connection)

Bar code reader
Ethernet REGIUS 170 #1

Serial no. : 0100
CS-2 #1 (standard JM) Host name : r170-0100
Serial no. : 0025 IP address : 192.168.20.170
Host name : CS2-0025
IP address : 192.168.20.90
Hub
Printer
Viewer/Server
REGIUS 170 #2
CS-2 #2 (backup JM) Serial no. : 0101
Serial no. : 0026 Host name : r170-0010
Host name : CS2-0026 IP address : 192.168.20.171
IP address : 192.168.20.91
The above example is a n-to-m configuration that includes two CS-2s

and two REGIUS 170s. If no IP addresses are specified by your facility,
use the IP addresses indicated in the above illustration.
The standard JM runs on CS-2 #1 and a backup JM runs on CS-2 #2.
The same basic configuration is used when two CS-2s are connected
to one REGIUS 170, and when one CS-2 is connected to two REGIUS
170s.
Setting example CS-2 #1 (Standard JM)
Item Setting
Host name CS2-0025
IP address 192.168.20.90
JM Standard JM
Bar code registration method Pre-registration
CS-2 #2 (Backup JM)
Item to be set Setting

Host name CS2-0026
IP address 192.168.20.91
JM Backup JM
Bar code registration method Pre-registration

REGIUS 170 #1

Host name r170-0100
Host name (in Job Manager) r170-0100
IP address 192.168.20.170
REGIUS 170 #2

Host name r170-0101
Host name (in Job Manager) r170-0101
IP address 192.168.20.171
IMPORTANT A bar code reader is required for each CS-2 because it is

used for pre-registration.
IMPORTANT To start/quit the CS-2, the CS-2 on which the standard JM

runs must be started up first and closed last.

1 - 19
1.7 Service Tool Screens

1.7.1 Service Tool Screens
Setting and maintenance of the CS-2 can be implemented by starting
the Service Tool. As shown in the screen flow on the page, there are
two Service Tool initial screens: one is activated from the System
menu, and the other is activated from the REGIUS Service Screen.
However, number of setting items on the initial screen activated from
the system menu is limited.Use the Service Tool activated from the
REGIUS Service Screen to perform settings during installation.
Screens when started from

System Menu
Screens when started from

REGIUS Service Screen

Opening the REGIUS Service The following procedure describes how to open the REGIUS Service
Screen Screen.
IMPORTANT The REGIUS Service Screen can only be opened using

the following procedure. Note that clicking [Shutdown] in
the System menu automatically closes Windows and
turns off the CS-2.
1. In the initial CS-2 application splash screen, click [Konica REGIUS].

The System menu appears.
IMPORTANT The displayed content differs depending on the initial

screen setting.
2. From the System menu, click [Utility].

A password input screen appears.

1 - 21
3. Input the Service Tool password (5678) and then click [J].
The Service Tool starts.
4. Click [Exit].
A confirmation dialog appears.
5. Click [Yes].
The screen returns to the System menu.
6. From the System menu, click [Shutdown].

7. Click [Yes].
The REGIUS Service Screen (REGIUS Remote Maintenance Server)
appears after exiting the CS-2 application.
• Clicking [Service Tool] displays the password input screen. Input

the Service Tool password (5678) and then click [J]. The Service
Tool starts up; this tool can be used to configure or change all CS-2
settings.

• Clicking [CS2] starts up the CS-2 application.

• Clicking [Shutdown] closes Windows and turns the CS-2 OFF.
• Clicking [Restart] restarts the CS-2 and the CS-2 application starts
up again.
• Clicking [Windows Desktop] exits the REGIUS Service Screen and
returns you to the Window desktop.
Opening the REGIUS Service

Screen when the Admin Log-In
Mode is ON
1. Input the log-in name and password in the “Log-in” screen.

Log-in Name : “5”, “2”, “4”, “6”
Password : Maker Password
Log-in is made by the maker authority and the initial screen will be dis-
played.
2. Click the [KONICA MINOLTA] in the initial screen of the CS-2.

System menu will be displayed.
3. Click the [Shut Down] of the system menu.

Confirmation dialogue will be displayed.
4. Click the [YES].

After the CS-2 application is shut down, the “REGIUS Service (Regius
Remote Maintenance Server)” screen will be displayed.

1 - 23

2 Installing the CS-2
2.1 Installation Flow
2.1 Installation Flow

The overall workflow for installation is listed below.
Start
1. Unpacking & connecting Section 3, "Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2"
2. Setting up the CS-2 Operation Unit Section 4, "Setting Up the CS-2 Operation
Unit"
3. CS-2 PROGRAM version Section 5, "Upgrading the CS-2 Program"
4. Connecting the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 Section 6.1, "Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection"
Section 6.2, "Setting up an n-to-m Connection"
Configure settings to connect the CS-2,
REGIUS 170 and JM.
5. Connecting to the system Section 7.1, "Connecting a luminance meter"

Section 7.2, "Connecting to the Network"
Move the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 specified location
and connect to the network, then connect optional Section 7.3, "Installing Bar Code Reader"
devices. Once that work is completed, connect the
luminance meter to adjust the brightness of the
operation unit.
6. Setting up the CS-2 Section 8, "Setting Up the CS-2"
Set facilityand peripheral device information.
7. Adjusting the CS-2 Operation Unit brightness Section 9, "Adjusting the Brightness of the
CS-2 Operation Unit"
8. Checking operation Section 10.1, "Checking the Image"

Check the image output from the REGIUS 170.
9. Back up Section 10.2, "Backing Up the Set Up Data"
Configure backup settings for the CS-2 and

REGIUS 170 parameters.
End

2-1
2.2 Checks Prior to Installation

Check the following items before installing the CS-2.
Installation Location
Check that the installation site satisfies the conditions listed below.
• Install the device in a location where it is not exposed to water or
floor wax.
• Install the device in a location where there is no likelihood of being
adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity,
drafts, light, dust or air containing salt, sulfur, etc.
• Install the device on a flat surface where it is free from violation or
physical shock (also avoid physical shocks during transportation).
• Install the device in a location where chemical agents are not
stored.
• Install the device in a location where no gas is generated.
• Install the device in a location where there are no electrical noise
sources.
• Lay the cable so that it is not tripped over by the staff working
around the device.
• Install the device in a location where the air inlet and outlet are not
blocked.
• Install the device in a location where a minimum of 150 mm of
space in front and in rear of the CS-2 can be secured.
2.2.1 System Condition

Work and setup required at the time of installation may vary depending
on the system configuration.
• Connection type of CS-2 and REGIUS 170. (whether the connec-
tion is made 1-to-1 or n-to-m)
• Registration method of cassette (post-registration, auto-registration
or pre-registration). However, a bar code reader is essential when
the connection is n-to-m.
• When registration with a bar code reader (advance registration) is
selected, install the bar code reader to the CS-2.
2.2.2 Network Condition

In the case that the CS-2 is connected to the facility's network, acquire
the following information by interviewing the system adminstrator in
your facility.
• The factory default settings can be used; alternately, you may need
to contact your facility's system adminstrator.
• IP addresses of CS-2 and REGIUS 170.
• When a setup for gateway is necessary, IP address of the gateway.

2.2.3 CS-2 Operation Unit

The CS-2 Operation Unit is a color LCD monitor with a touch panel.
After installing it in an appropriate location, calibrate the touch panel
and adjust the brightness.
The brightness must be adjusted while monitor display brightness is
stable. Typically, the display will become stable 20 minutes after being
turned ON. Note that turning the power OFF for a short period of time
during system reboot has little effect on the display, thus such short
interruptions can be ignored.

2-3
2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation
2.3 Tools and Jigs Required for Installation

Prepare the following tools and jigs before starting the installation.
Item Purpose
Luminance Meter Adjust the luminance of the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• Luminance meter (Konica Minolta LS-100)
• Luminance meter cable (LS-A12)
• Chest front side image
Floppy disk (several disks) Back up CS-2 settings data
Cross cable for Ethernet or Ethernet Cable & Connect the REGIUS 170 to a network
Hub
Double-side tape Secure the stand for bar code reader
3P-2P AC plug adapter (several pieces) May be needed to check CS-2 operation at a site other than
installation site or for temporary installation of the REGIUS 170
Latest version of the CS-2 PROGRAM CD Upgrade the system

3 Unpacking & Assembling
the CS-2
3.1 Unpacking
3.1 Unpacking
Unpack the CS-2 Control Unit and CS-2 Operation Unit and check that
there are no damaged or missing items.
3.1.1 CS-2 Control Unit

1. PC Main Body
2. Keyboard (2m)
3. Mouse (1.8m)
4. Power cable
5. Quick Reference (Manual)
6. PC service & support guide
7. IBM warranty, IBM warranty service flow
8. Stand for vertical installation
9. Up flow vent
10. Power plug with ground
11. IBM items in package and software list
12. Warranty (KMMG)
13. Instruction manual

3-1
3.1 Unpacking
3.1.2 CS-2 Operation Unit

1. Monitor
2. Power cord
3. 2-lead adaptor
4. Signal cable (MD-C87)
5. USB cable (MD-C93)
6. Stereo mini jack cable
7. Instruction Manual (this book)
8. Warranty
9. Screws for the stand (M4 × 12mm, 4 pieces)
10.CD-ROM for touch panel (includes TouchWare touch panel driver
software and an instruction manual)

3.2 Assembling
3.2 Assembling
3.2.1 Connecting Cables
Refer to the following illustration to connect the CS-2 main unit and any
accessories.
CS-2 Control Unit CS-2 Operation Unit

(rear view)
Mouse (rear view)
Keyboard
AC100V AC100V
3.2.2 Attaching the up flow vent

Refer to the following illustration to attach the upflow vent; insert it into
the groove provided in the rear of the CS-2 Control Unit.

3-3
3.2 Assembling
3.2.3 Attaching the stand for vertical installation

Refer to the following illustration to position the CS-2 Control Unit;
place the lower front part in the included stand.

4 Setting Up the CS-2
Operation Unit
4.1 Setting the Touch Panel

4.1.1 Checking the Factory Default Status
1. To start up the CS-2, turn ON the CS-2 Operation Unit and CS-2
Control Unit, in that order.
IMPORTANT When the following Examination Registration screen

appears, there is no error with the factory default status.
2. Click [Return to Windows Desktop] in the REGIUS Service screen.

Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details on how to open
the REGIUS Service screen.
4.1.2 Installing the Touch Panel Software

Then proceed to the installation of the touch panel driver software.
To install the touch panel driver, shut down the CS-2 application first,
then operate on the Windows desktop.
IMPORTANT It is necessary to go through the "REGIUS Service"

screen to display the Windows desktop. Note that shutting
down directly using the system menu by clicking
"Shutdown" will automatically shut down the Windows,
resulting in power off of the CS-2. Refer to Section 1.7,
"Service Tool Screens" for details of opening the
"REGIUS Service" screen.
1. Shut down the CS-2 application, and display the "REGIUS Service"
screen.
Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to dis-
play the "REGIUS Service" screen.

4-1
2. Click [Windows Desktop].
• REGIUS Service Screen closes, and the Windows desktop will be

shown.
• "Found New Hardware Wizard" screen is displayed on the desktop.
3. Click [Cancel].

4. Insert into the CD-RW drive the CD-ROM that is provided in the CS-3
Operation Unit packing.
CD will be auto-started, and wait for the following screen to appear.
5. Click [Install Software].

4-3
6. Click [TouchWare for Windows(95,98,Me,NT4,2000,XP)].

A Wizard will start to install the touch panel driver software.
7. Click [Next >].
8. Click [I Accept] , then [Next >].

9. Click [USB] , then [Next >].
10. Click [Express Install], then [Next >].

Copy of files initiates, followed by display of the screen below.
11. Click [Cont].

Installation of the driver initiates.

4-5
12. Click [Yes, I want to view the ReadMe file. ] to untick the check mark,
then click [Finish].
13. Click [OK].
IMPORTANT If the USB port on the CS-2 Control Unit, to which the
USB cable from the CS-2 Operation Unit shall be
connected is changed, the touch panel will be detected as
a new device, and the "New Device Detected" wizard will
be displayed again. Therefore, do not change the USB
port to which the connection is made.

4.2 Adjusting the speaker volume

If necessary, refer to Section 1.3.4, "CS-2 Operation Unit (Front View)"
to check the button position, then adjust the speaker volume according
to the following procedure.
1. Press the [ENT.] button.

The following screen appears.
2. Select <Sound> and then press the [ENT.] button.

3. Select <Volume> and then press the [ENT.] button.


4-7
4. Press the [YZ] Control button to adjust the sound to the appropriate
volume.
5. Press the [ENT.] button.

6. Select <Return> and then press the [ENT.] button.

7. Select <Menu OFF> and then press the [ENT.] button to quit the
Screen Manager application.

5 Upgrading the CS-2
Program
How to upgrade the CS-3 program is described in
this chapter. If the program installed on the CS-3
that is delivered from the factory is not the latest
one, follow the procedures described in this chap-
ter and upgrade the program.
5.1 Upgrading the CS-2 PROGRAM

IMPORTANT Follow the procedures below to upgrade the CS-2
PROGRAM installed on the CS-2 Control Unit by factory
default. If the program is the latest version, perform Steps
8 and 9 and then close Windows.
1. Insert the CS-2 PROGRAM CD in the CD drive.
2. The CS-2 Setup screen appears. Click the [Cancel] button.
3. Right-click the [Start] button, then select [Explorer (X)] from the popup
menu.

5-1
4. In the hierarchical folder tree on the left side of the Explorer window,
click the CD drive and then the folder named “Versionup”, then double-
click the [Install] icon on the right side of Explorer.
The command prompt appears and upgrading of the CS-2 PROGRAM
begins.
IMPORTANT The items displayed on the screen will be different

depending on the CS-2 Program.
5. When "Install completed." is displayed, press the <Enter> key.
IMPORTANT Several command prompts may appear depending on the

CS-3 PROGRAM. If other command prompts still remain
on the screen after the message ÅgInstall completedÅh is
displayed, wait until all other command prompts disappear
before pressing the [Enter] key.

6. Click [X] at the upper right corner of the “Explore” to close the screen.
IMPORTANT If RmtGroup(.Dbg) icon is located on the Windows

desktop, drag it to the trash box and empty the trash box.
7. Eject the CS-2 PROGRAM CD from the CD drive.
8. Click [Start] in the lower left corner of the screen and then click
"Shutdown options (U)" from the displayed menu.
9. Click [Turn Off] Computer to shut down the Windows.

5-3

6 Connecting a CS-2
and REGIUS 170
This chapter describes how to connect a CS-2,
REGIUS 170 and JM. Since settings differ depend-
ing on the system configuration, explanations are
provided for both 1-to-1 and n-to-m connections.
This chapter only explains basic settings. For an
explanation of other settings in a specific setup
screen, see Section 15, "Service Tool Screens".
6.1 Setting Up a 1-to-1 Connection

This section describes how to connect a single CS-2 to a single
REGIUS 170 using a 1-to-1 connection.
Small-sized networks such as connecting a single CS-2, REGIUS 170
and KonicaMinolta printer can be created without changing the factory
default settings. When a factory default CS-2 is connected to a
REGIUS 170, the post-registration method is used.
However, for the case described below, change the setting of CS-2 and
REGIUS 170 according to the procedure described in this section.
• When it is necessary to change the address because the system is
connected to the facility's existing network.
• To connect several 1-to-1 connection units to the same network.
The explanation in this section is based on the settings shown below.
Printer
Viewer/Server
Ethernet
Hub
CS-2
Serial no. : 0025 REGIUS 170
Host name : CS2-0025 Serial no. : 0100
IP address : 192.168.20.90 Host name : r170-0100
Cassette registration : Auto-registration IP address : 128.100.50.11
Subnet mask : 255.255.0.0
IMPORTANT It is possible to configure a 1-to-1 connection system to

use pre-registration; however, as a rule, you should use
the post-registration or auto-registration method.
To use pre-registration, you must connect a bar code reader.

6-1
6.1.1 Network Setting of REGIUS 170

Temporary Connection of CS-2 and To connect a CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 via Ethernet, the devices have
REGIUS 170 been configured so that they can communicate using the factory
default. The set up of the REGIUS 170 below shall be made by
temporary connecting the CS-2 in a 1-to-1 configuration.
1. Plug the REGIUS 170 into a wall outlet.
2. Using a cross cable or hub, connect the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in a 1-
to-1 configuration.
IMPORTANT This configuration is a temporary case purely for the

purposes of configuring the REGIUS 170. Do not connect
several REGIUS 170s to the hub at the same time. Doing
so prevents correct recognition of each device due to the
fact that all REGIUS 170s are preset with the same IP
address, and in consequence it becomes impossible to
set up the device.
REGIUS 170 to be set up

Temporary hub
CS-2
or
Cross cable
IMPORTANT If the CS-2 or JM settings are changed before setting up

the REGIUS 170, the REGIUS 170 cannot be set up
because communication with the REGIUS 170 is
disabled. If this happens, reset the CS-2 to the factory
defaults and try again.
Starting up a CS-2 and REGIUS 170
1. Press the power switch on the CS-2 Control Unit to start up the CS-2.
Wait until the initial screen shows after the CS-2 starts up.
2. Turn ON the circuit breaker for the REGIUS 170.
3. Press the operation switch on the REGIUS 170 to turn ON the power.
Wait for the REGIUS 170 to complete initialization and to show
“READY” on the LCD.

Setting up the REGIUS 170 The following procedures are initiated from the CS-2 Operation Unit.
1. Use the mouse or touch panel to open the REGIUS Service Screen.
Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of how to open
the REGIUS Service Screen.
2. Click Service Tool.

A password input screen appears again.
3. Input the Service Tool password (5678) and then click OK.
The Service Tool (Console) screen appears.
4. Click Reader.
The Service Tool (Reader) screen appears.

6-3
5. In the “REGIUS 170” setting field on the bottom of the screen,click the
[Network] button.
Current status of networking information acquired from REGIUS 170
appears on the “Network Info.” screen.
The CS-2 is defined by the factory defaults in the HOSTS file in the
REGIUS 170.
6. Input the network condition for REGIUS 170 in the “Reader” column by
referring to the following table.
Item to be set Description

Host Name Input the host name of the target REGIUS
170.
r170-**** : **** indicates the serial number.
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase.

IP Address Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170.
Netmask Input the subnet mask of the network.
Example:

7. Input in “DBHOST” of “Console/JobManager” the host name that will

be assigned to the REGIUS170.

DBHOST Input the host name of the JM. It is fixed as “jm1-
0001”
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase.
Example:
8. In the list of “Hosts”, select the host name for the CS-2 and then click
“Edit”.
Edit dialog appears.
9. Input the host name and IP address of the CS-2 that will be connected
to the REGIUS 170 and then click [OK].
IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to input the host name

of the CS-2.
Confirmation dialog for rewriting appears.
10. Click [Yes].

The host name and IP address that were input in the “Hosts” list
appear.
Example:

6-5
11. Click [New].

New dialog appears.
12. In a same manner as Steps 9 and 10, input the host name “jm1-0001”
and the IP address “128.100.50.1”, and click [OK
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input the host name

(jm1-0001).
Dialogue to confirm addition appears.
13. Click [YES].

Added information appears in the “Hosts” list.
Example:
IMPORTANT Because the console (CS-2) and JM will be accessed for

different purposes, as shown above, assign different IP
addresses to the CS2-0025 and jm1-0001.
14. Click “Send”.

The setting shown on the screen will be sent to the REGIUS 170, and
the network setting will be altered.
• These setting conditions will be written in the CF (Compact Flash)

of the REGIUS 170.
IMPORTANT For a 1-to-1 connection, the CS-2 that will be registered in

the Hosts list should be the one that is connected to the
target REGIUS 170.

15. Click “Exit” to close the Network Set Up screen.

Returns to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.
16. Press the operation switch to turn off the power of the REGIUS 170.
17. Turn off the circuit breaker of the REGIUS 170.

Implementing the above procedure completes the set up of REGIUS
170. Then proceed to the set up of the CS-2.
CAUTION The REGIUS-170 whose network condition has been

changed is no more capable of communicating with the CS-
2 until the network condition of the CS-2 (and JM) is newly
set up. Upon the start up of the REGIUS 170, a network
error appears on the LCD after completing the initialization,
and its own MAC address and IP address will blink alter-
nately.
6.1.2 Setting up the CS-2

This section describes how to set up JM on the CS-2, the settings
required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the network
settings for the CS-2 itself.
Setting up JM on the CS-2
1. In the Service Tool screen, select Console and then in the "Input/
Output" settings area click the [Job Manager] button.
The JOBM INFO screen appears.
By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on

the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a
REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.
2. In the “Basic Setting” area, select the “Auto-registration” option from

the drop down menu to the right of the Register setting.

6-7
3. In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, select the

“ON” checkbox for the “Built-in” setting.
4. In the Host Name field, enter a host name for the CS-2 itself (CS2-****:
**** indicates a serial number).
IMPORTANT Always use uppercase for the CS-2 host name.
Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) in the above system.
5. Click the [Save & Exit] button, then click [Yes] in the confirmation
dialog.
The Service Tool screen appears.
Setting up the JM database If the host name of the CS-2 or REGIUS 170 has been changed from
the factory default, you must use the following procedure to update the
information registered in the database.

for the CS-2 and lowercase to input the host name for the
REGIUS170.
1. On the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button.

2. In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Configure] button.

The PostgreSQL access tool starts.
Changing the Registered Informa-

tion of CS-2 and REGIUS 170
1. When the host name of CS-2 is changed, double-click [c_status] of

“PostgreSQL access” tool.
“c_status” screen appears.
When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use uppercase when
entering the host name for the CS-2.
IMPORTANT By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name

registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it
possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the
factory defaults.
2. Click [CS1-0001].
Switches to the text input mode.

6-9
3. Rewrite “CS1-0001” to the altered host name (uppercase).

Example: Configuring the CS-2 system (serial no. 0025)
4. After completing the input, click [Reload] --> [Close].

“c_status” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.
5. When the host name of REGIUS 170 is changed, double-click

[r_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool.
“r_status” screen appears.
IMPORTANT When using the PostgreSQL access tool, always use

uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2.
6. Click [r170-0001].
7. Rewrite “r170-0001” to the altered host name (lower case) of the

REGIUS 170.
Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 (serial no. 0100) in the above
system.

“r_status” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

9. When the host name of REGIUS 170 is changed, double-click

[r_version] of “PostgreSQL access” tool.
“r_version” screen appears.

10. Click [r170-0001].

11. Rewrite “r170-0001” to the altered host name(lower case) of the

REGIUS 170.
system.

“r_version” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.

6-11
13. When the host name of the CS-2 or the REGIUS 170 is changed,
double-click [relations].
“relations” screen appears.

uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2 and
lowercase for the host name for the REGIUS 170.
14. When the host name of the CS-2 is changed, click “CS1-0001”, and
rewrite it to the altered host name(uppercase).
15. When the host name of the REGIUS 170 is changed, click “r170-0001”,
and rewrite it to the altered host name (lower case).
Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) and REGIUS 170
(serial no. 0100) in the above system.

“relation” screen closes, and switches to “Postgre SQL access” tool.
Setting the cassette registration Check the cassette registration method.

method "0" (post-registration or auto-registration) is set by default.
The relationship between "reg_type" and the cassette registration
method configured in the “Setting up JM on the CS-2” section is
described in the table below. Always set according to this relationship.
Cassette registration method reg_type

Post-registration 1
Auto-registration 1
Pre-registration 0

1. In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “sys_config” entry.

The “sys_config” screen appears.
2. Check that "reg_type" is set to "1".
3. Click [Reload] and then [Close] .

The “sys_config” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool
reappears.
4. In the PostgreSQL access screen, click "Database" and then select

[Exit].
The PostgreSQL access tool closes and the Service Tool (Adjustment)
screen reappears.

6-13
Establishing a network connection

between the CS-2 and REGIUS 170
1. In the Service Tool screen, click the [Console] button and then in the
“System” settings area click the [System Info] button.
The SYSTEM INFO screen appears.
2. Select "System Config. (Reader)" from the list at the left side of the
screen.
3. In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if it is not already selected, select

the “Registered” check box next to the "Reader 1" entry.
4. Click the "Model Name (Generic)" field and enter the generic name of
the REGIUS 170.

5. Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and enter the
specific name of the REGIUS 170.
These names are displayed in the System Status and Service Tool
screens of the CS-2 application and allow users to select a specific
REGIUS 170.
6. Click the [Save&Exit] button and then click [Yes] when the confirmation
dialog is displayed.
The Service Tool (Console) screen reappears.
7. Click the [Reader] button.

8. In the "System" settings area, click the [Reader] button.

The CCU INFO screen appears.
9. In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using uppercase letters, enter the host
name for the REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field.
IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter this host name.
10. In the “TCP/IP” settings area, using lowercase letters, enter the host
name for the REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field.
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to enter this host name.

6-15
11. In the “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for the REGIUS 170
in the “IP Address” field.
system.
12. Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] when the confirmation dialog is
displayed.
The Service Tool (Reader) screen reappears.
Setting the network connection for

the CS-2 itself
1. Quit the Service Tool and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the
REGIUS Service screen to display the Windows desktop.
2. Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen and
then select “Control Panel (C)” from the displayed menu.

3. In the Control Panel, click the "Network and Internet Connections"

icon.
4. Click the "Network Connections" icon.
5. Double-click "Local Area Connections".

6-17
6. Click "Properties (P)".
7. Double-click "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)".
8. Set the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties.

9. Click [OK].
10. Click [OK].

6-19
Shutting down the system
1. Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.
2. Click the "Shutdown Options (U)" icon.
3. Select "Shutdown (U)" from the displayed dialog.

The CS-2 is turned OFF.
4. Remove the Ethernet cable that was temporarily connected between

the CS-2 Control Unit and the REGIUS 170.
Implementing the above procedures completes the set up one each of

REGIUS 170 and CS-2.
To set up several CS-2s and REGIUS 170s, repeat the procedures
starting from Section 6.1.1, "Network Setting of REGIUS 170".

6.2 Setting up an n-to-m Connection

This section describes an n-to-m configuration that includes two CS-2s
and two REGIUS 170s.
In this example, the settings are based on the conditions requested by
the facility.
Bar code reader
REGIUS 70 #1
Serial no. : 0100
Ethernet Host name : r170-0100
IP address : 128.100.50.11
CS-2 (standard JM)
Serial no. : 0025
IP address : 128.100.50.1
Subnet mask : 255.255.0.0 Printer
Cassette registration : Pre-registration Hub Viewer/Server
REGIUS 70 #2
Serial no. : 0101
Host name : r170-0101
IP address : 128.100.50.12
CS-2 (backup JM)
Serial no. : 0026
IP address : 128.100.50.2
Subnet mask : 255.255.0.0
Cassette registration : Pre-registration
IMPORTANT In an n-to-m configuration, the bar code registration

method must be set to "Pre-registration".
IMPORTANT To start operating the system, always turn on the power of

the CS-2 which incorporates the standatd JM, and turn off
this CS-2 last when terminating the operation. Instruct the
users to observe this rule in daily operation.

6-21
6.2.1 Setting Up the REGIUS 170

Temporarily Connecting the CS-2 To enable the CS-2 to implement the set up of REGIUS 170 via
and REGIUS 170 Ethernet, both have been set up at the factory so that they can
communicate using the factory setting. The set up of REGIUS 170 in
the below shall be made by temporary connecting the CS-2 in a “1-to-
1” configuration.
1. Plug the REGIUS 170 into a wall outlet.
2. Connect the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in 1-to-1 using cross cable or hub.
IMPORTANT This connection is a temporary case purely for the

purpose of setting the REGIUS 170. Do not connect
several units of REGIUS 170 to hub at the same time.
Doing so hinders recognition of each device due to the
fact that all of REGIUS 170 are preset at the same IP
address and in consequence it becomes impossible to set
up.
REGIUS 170 to be set up

Temporary hub
CS-2
or
Cross cable
IMPORTANT If the setting of CS-2 or JM is changed before setting the

REGIUS 170, setting of the REGIUS 170 becomes
impossible because communication with the REGIUS 170
is disabled. If this happens, reset the CS-2 to factory
setting the factory setting and try again.
Starting up a CS-2 and REGIUS 170
1. Press the power SW of the CS-2 Control Unit.

Wait until the initial screen shows after the CS-2 starts up.
2. Turn ON the circuit breaker of REGIUS 170.
3. Press the Operation switch of the REGIUS 170 to turn ON the power.
Wait for the REGIUS 170 to complete initialization and to show
“READY” on the LCD.

Setting of REGIUS170 Following procedures shall be initiated from the CS-2 Operation Unit.
1. Operate the mouse or touch panel to open the REGIUS Service

Screen.
Refer to 1.6.1 for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.
2. Click [Service Tool].

A password input screen appears again.
3. Input a Service Tool password (5678) and then click OK.

4. Click [Reader].

6-23
5. Click [Network] in the "REGIUS 170" field located on the bottom of the
screen.
Current status of networking information acquired from REGIUS 170
appears on the network setting screen.
The CS-2 is defined by the factory defaults in the HOSTS file in the
REGIUS 170.
6. Input the network condition for REGIUS 170 in the “Reader” column by
referring to the following table.

Host Name Input the host name of the target REGIUS 170.
r170-**** : **** indicates the serial number.
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input.
IP Address Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170.
Netmask Input the subnet mask of the REGIUS 170.
Example: Configuring the REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the

above system.

7. Input in “DBHOST” of “Console/JobManager” the host name of the JM

with which the REGIUS 170 communicate.

DBHOST Input the host name of the JM.
It is fixed as “jm1-0001”.
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input.
Example:
8. In the list of “Hosts”, select the host name for CS-2 (CS2-#1), and click
[Edit].
Edit dialog appears.
9. Input the host name and IP address of the first CS-2 which will be
connected to the REGIUS 170.

of CS-2.
Confirmation dialog for rewriting appears.
10. Click [Yes].

appears.
11. Click [New].

New dialog appears.

6-25
12. Input the host name and IP address of the second CS-2 (CS-2 #2)
which will be connected to the REGIUS 170.

of CS-2.
Confirmation dialog for addition appears.
13. Click [Yes].

appears.
Example: Setting of the CS-2 #1(serial no.: 0025), CS-2 #2 (serial no.:
0026) in the above system.
14. In a same manner as the step 11 through 13, input the host name
“jm1-0001” and the IP address “128.100.50.1”, and click [OK].
Further to set the back up JM, input the host name “jm1-0002” and the
IP address “128.100.50.2”.
IMPORTANT Always use lowercase characters to input (jm1-0001, jm1-

0002).
Dialogue to confirm addition appears.
15. Click [YES].

Added information appears in the “Hosts” list.
Example:
IMPORTANT Because the console (CS-2) and the JM will be accessed

for different purpose, assign the same IP address to both
CS2-0025 and jm1-0001 as shown above. Same should
be applied to CS2-0026 and jm1-0002.

16. After checking that the host name shown in the “Hosts” list and the IP
address is correct and not duplicating the other, then click “Send”.
The setting shown on the screen will be sent to the REGIUS 170, and
the network setting will be altered.
• These setting conditions will be written in the CF (Compact Flash)

of the REGIUS 170.
Example: Setting of the REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no.: 0101) in the above
system.
17. Click [Exit] to close the “Network Info.” screen.

18. Press and hold the operation switch for 5sec to turn off the power of
the REGIUS 170.
19. Turn off the circuit breaker of the REGIUS 170.
IMPORTANT In the case that the CS-2s and REGIUS 170s are
connected in “n” to “m” configuration, the settings for “JM”
and “Hosts” should be same for all REGIUS 170s to be
connected. “Host Name” and “IP Address” of “Reader”
should be unique for each REGIUS 170.
CAUTION The REGIUS-170 whose network condition has been

changed is no more capable of communicating with the CS-
2 until the network condition of the CS-2 (and JM) is newly
set up. Upon the start up of the REGIUS 170, a network
error appears on the LCD after completing the initialization,
and its own MAC address and IP address will blink alter-
nately.
20. Click [Exit] on the “Service Tool” screen.

Confirmation dialog appears.

6-27
21. Click [Yes].

Switches to the “REGIUS Service Screen”.
22. Click [Shut down].

“REGIUS Service” screen will close, and termination sequence will be initi-
ated. Upon closure of the CS-2 application, the power of CS-2 will be turned
off.
23. Remove the Ethernet cable that is temporary connected between the
CS-2 Control Unit and the REGIUS 170.
Implementing the above procedures completes the set up one

REGIUS 170.
To set up all REGIUS 170s that should be connected, repeat the
procedures starting from "Temporarily Connecting the CS-2 and
REGIUS 170" on page 6-22.

6.2.2 Setting up the Standard JM on the CS-2

This section describes how to set up JM on the CS-2, the settings
required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the network
settings for the CS-2 itself.
For details of how to set up the backup JM, refer to Section 6.2.3,
"Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2".
Setting up the standard JM on the

CS-2
“Input/Output” settings area click the [Job Manager] button.
By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name registered in JM on

the CS-2. This is done to make it possible to connect the CS-2 to a
REGIUS 170 using the factory defaults.
2. Select the “Auto-registration” option from the drop down menu to the
right of the Register setting.
3. In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, select the

“ON” checkbox for the “Built-in” setting.

6-29
Example: Configuring the CS-2 (serial no. 0025) in the above system.
5. To use CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) as a backup JM, select the

“Registered Device” checkbox in the "Communication Setting
(Backup)" settings area.
• Enter the IP address for CS-2 #2 in the "IP Address" field.
6. Click [Save&Exit] and then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.

The screen switches back to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

Setting up the JM database If the host name of the CS-2 or REGIUS 170 has been changed from
the factory default, you must use the following procedure to update the
information registered in the database.
IMPORTANT Always use uppercase characters to enter the host name

for the CS-2 and lowercase to enter the host name for the
REGIUS 170.
1. In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button.
2. In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Configure] button.


6-31
Connecting the CS-2 & REGIUS 170
1. In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “c-status” entry.

The “c_status” screen appears.

IMPORTANT By default, “CS1-0001” is used for the host name

registered in JM on the CS-2. This is done to make it
possible to connect the CS-2 to a REGIUS 170 using the
factory defaults.
2. Click "CS1-0001".
The system enters text input mode.
3. Input "CS1-0001" for the host name (uppercase) for the first CS-2.
4. Press the TAB key to move to the "c_stat" row.
5. Enter "2".
Press the TAB key to move to the next row.
The system enters text input mode again.
6. Enter the host name of the second CS-2 and press the TAB key to
move to the "c_stat" column.
7. Enter “2”.
Example: Configuring CS-2 #1 (serial no. 0025) and CS-2 #2 (serial
no. 0026) in the above system.
8. When you finish entering, click [Reload].
9. Check that all entries are correct, then click [Exit].

The "c_status" screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool
reappears.

10. In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “r-status” entry.

The r_status screen appears.

11. Click "r170-0001".

12. Rewrite "r170-0001" by the host name (lowercase) for the first REGIUS
170.
13. Press the TAB key to move to the "r_stat" column.
14. Enter “2".

Press the TAB key to move to the next row.
The next row now accepts text input.
15. Enter the host name (lowercase) for the second REGIUS 170 and
press the TAB key to move to the "r_stat" column.
16. Enter “2”.

Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) and REGIUS
170 #2 (serial no. 0101) in the above system.
17. After completing the input, click [Reload] and [Close] in that order.
“r_status” screen closes, and switches to “PostgreSQL access” tool.

6-33
18. In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “r-version” entry.

The “r_version” screen appears.

uppercase to enter the host name for the CS-2.
19. Click “r170-0001”.

20. Rewrite “r170-0001” by the host name (lowercase) for the first REGIUS
170.
21. Press the TAB key to move to the next row.

22. Enter the host name (lowercase) for the second REGUIS 170.
23. When you finish entering host name information, click [Reload] and
then [Close].
“r_version” screen will close, and switch to “PostgreSQL access” tool.

Setting the Relations Set the relationship between the CS-2(s) and REGIUS 170(s). In the
“n-to-m connection”, setting the relations between the CS-2 and
REGIUS 170 will enable a linked-operation as to the power control,
error information between the CS-2 and corresponding REGIUS 170.
This section describes settings used to associate CS-2s and REGIUS
170s.
1. In the PostgreSQL access screen, double-click the “relations” entry.

The “relations” screen appears.

uppercase when entering the host name for the CS-2 and
lowercase to enter the host name for the REGIUS 170.
2. Click "CS1-0001" and input the host name for the first CS-2 (use only
uppercase characters).
3. Press the TAB key to move to the "re_name" column.
4. Rewrite the host name by the first REGIUS 170 (use only lowercase
characters).
5. Press the TAB key to move to the "alert" column.
6. Enter "1" and press the TAB key again.

7. Enter the host name for the first CS-2 (use only uppercase characters).
8. Press the TAB key to move to the "re_name" column.
9. Enter the host name for the second REGIUS 170 (use only lowercase
characters).
10. Press the TAB key to move to the "alert" column.
11. Enter "1" and press the TAB key.

6-35
12. In the same way, enter the host name for the second CS-2 and
REGIUS 170.
Example: Settings when all CS-2 and REGIUS 170 in the above sys-
tem are all related.
13. When you finish entering host name information, click [Reload] and
then [Close].
The “relations” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool
reappears.
Setting the cassette registration This section describes how to set the cassette registration method.
method By default, the method is set to "1" (Post-registration or Auto-
registration).
The relationship between "reg_type" and the cassette registration
method configured in the "Setting up JM on the CS-2" on page 6-7 is
described in the table below. Always set according to this relationship.
Cassette registration method reg_type

Post-registration 1
Auto-registration 1
Pre-registration 0
1. In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “sys_config” entry.

The “sys_config” screen appears.
2. Enter 0 (zero) in the "reg_type" field.
3. Click [Reload] and then [Close] in that order.

The “sys_config” screen closes and the PostgreSQL access tool
reappears.

4. In the PostgreSQL access screen, select [Database] > [Exit].
The PostgreSQL access screen closes and the Service Tool screen
reappears.
Backing up JM information After you set up the JM database, you can back up the settings to a
floppy disk.
1. Insert a floppy disk in the CS-2 Control Unit floppy disk drive.
2. In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment] button and then in the
Job Manager settings area click the [Backup] button.
A command prompt appears on the screen and backup starts.

Backup data is saved on the floppy disk in a file called
“jm_backup.bat”.
Upon completion of backup, the command prompt closes.
3. Remove the backup floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.

6-37
Setting the CS-2 to connect with This section describes how to set up the REGIUS 170s connected to
the REGIUS 170 the CS-2 and the device name for each REGIUS 170.
"System" settings area click the [System Info] button.
screen.
3. In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if they are not already selected,
select the “Registered” check boxes next to the "Reader 1" and “reader
2” entries.
the REGIUS 170.

5. Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and enter the
specific name of the REGIUS 170.
REGIUS 170.
Enter names that you can identify easily (for example, the name of the
X-ray room where the REGIUS 170 is installed.)
Example: X-ray Room No. 1, X-Ray Room No. 2, etc.
6. In the Service Tool screen, click the [Reader] button.

7. In the “System” settings area, click the [Reader] button.

The display names of the REGIUS 170s you entered in Step 5 are
displayed In the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen.

6-39
8. Select the first REGIUS 170 device name.
name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field.
name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field.
11. In the “IP Address” of “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for
the first REGIUS 170 set in the “IP Address” field.
Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the above
system.
12. From the list in the upper left corner of the screen, select the second
REGIUS 170 device name.
13. Repeat Steps 9-11 to enter the Host Name, Host Name (JM) and the IP
Address for the second REGIUS 170.


the CS-2 itself

icon.

6-41

9. Click [OK].
10. Click [OK].

6-43
1. Click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.
2. Click the "Shutdown Options (U)" icon.
3. Select "Shutdown (U)" from the displayed dialog.

Set up of a standard JM on the CS-2 is completed.

The following section describes how to set up a backup JM on a CS-2.
6.2.3 Setting up a Backup JM on the CS-2

This section describes how to set up a backup JM on the CS-2, the
settings required to connect the CS-2 to the REGIUS 170 and the
network settings for the CS-2 itself.
Setting up a backup JM on the

CS-2
1. In the Service Tool screen, select the [Console] button and then in the
"Input/Output" settings area click the [Job Manager] button.

2. In the “Basic Setting” area, select the “Pre-registration” option from the
drop down menu to the right of the Register setting.
IMPORTANT For a CS-2 in an n-to-m configuration, always set pre-

registration for the cassette registration method.
Example: Configuring CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the above system.
4. In the "Communication Setting (Standard)" settings area, clear the

“ON” checkbox for the “Job Manager (build-in)” setting.
5. In the "Communication Setting” area, enter the IP address of the CS2

for the standard JM in "IP Address" of "Communication Setting".
Example: Configuring CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the above system.

6-45
6. To use a CS-2 as a backup JM, in the "Communication Setting

(Backup)" settings area, select the “Registered Device” checkbox .
• Select the "Job Manager (build in)" ON checkbox.

• Enter the IP address of CS-2 #2 (serial no. 0026) in the “IP Address
(backup)” field.
7. Click [Save & Exit] then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.
The screen switches back to the Service Tool screen.
Setting Up the Backup JM DB For the backup JM, register the database in the same manner as was
for "Setting Up the JM Database".
1. In the Service Tool screen, click the [Adjustment ] button.
2. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive of the CS-2 Control Unit
that contains the JM DB backup data that was backed up with the
Service Tool (Reader) screen.

3. In the “Job Manager” settings area, click the [Restore] button.
A command prompt appears on the screen and the restore operation

begins.
Upon completion of restoration, the command prompt closes.
This procedure sets the contents of the JM database on CS-2 so that
they are the same as CS-2 #1.
4. Remove the backup floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.
5. In the "Job Manager" settings area, click the [Configure] button.


6-47
6. In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “c-status” entry.

The “c_status” screen appears.
7. Check that the host name of each CS-2 is correctly set in "c_name"
and the value of "c_stat" is set to 2.
• If the value of "c_stat" is not 2, reenter the number 2 by clicking the
wrong number.
8. After confirming the above, click the [Close] button.
9. In the PostgreSQL access tool, double-click the “r-status” entry.

The “r_status” screen appears.
10. Check that the host name of each REGIUS 170 is correctly set in
"c_name" and that the value of "r_stat" is set to 2.
• If the value of "r_stat" is not 2, reenter the number 2 by clicking the
wrong number.
11. After confirming the above, click the [Close] button.

12. In the PostgreSQL access screen, select [Database] > [Exit].
The PostgreSQL access screen closes and the Service Tool screen
reappears.
Setting up a connection between This procedure is used to set up multiple connections between
the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 REGIUS 170s connected to a CS-2 and to name each REGIUS 170.
In this procedure, set the same content as was set for the standard JM.
“System” settings area click the [System Info] button.

6-49
screen.
3. In the “REGIUS 170” settings area, if they are not already selected,
select the “Registered” check boxes next to the "Reader 1" and “reader
2” entries.
the REGIUS 170.
5. Click the "Disp. Name" field to the right of "Reader 1" and “Reader 2”
and enter the specific name of the REGIUS 170.
REGIUS 170.
Enter names that you can identify easily (for example, the name of the
X-ray room where the REGIUS 170 is installed.)
Example: X-ray Room No. 1, X-Ray Room No. 2, etc.
6. Click [Save&Exit].


The display names of the REGIUS 170s you entered in Step 5 are
displayed In the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen.
9. From the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen, select the first
REGIUS 170 device name.
name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(Hosts)” field.
name for the first REGIUS 170 in the “Host Name(JM)” field.
12. In the “TCP/IP” settings area, enter the IP address for the first REGIUS
170 set in the “IP Address” field.
Example: Configuring REGIUS 170 #1 (serial no. 0100) in the above
system.

6-51
13. From the list in the upper left hand corner of the screen, select the
name of the second REGIUS 170.
14. Repeat Steps 9-11 to enter the Host Name, Host Name (JM) and the IP
Address for the second REGIUS 170.

the CS-2 itself

icon.


6-53
9. Click [OK].

10. Click [OK].
1. Left-click the [Start] button in the lower left hand corner of the screen.
2. Left-click "Shut down Options (U)" from the Start menu.
3. Left-click "Shut down (U)" from the displayed dialog.


6-55

7 Setting Up the System
This section describes how to connect a luminance
meter to adjust the brightness of the CS-2 Opera-
tion Unit, the basics of connecting the CS-2 and
REGIUS 170 to a network and how to install
optional devices.
7.1 Connecting a luminance meter
7.1 Connecting a luminance meter

After installing the CS-2 and REGIUS 170 at the specified site, connect
the liminance meter to adjust the CS-2 Operation Unit.
1. Use the cable (LS-A12) to connect CS-2 COM1 and the luminance
meter.
COM2
Communication port
(default setting)
2. Set the switches of the luminance meter as follows.
CALIBRATION : PRESET
MEASURING MODE : ABS
RESPONSE : FAST

7-1
7.2 Connecting to the Network

This section discusses the basics of connecting the CS-2 and REGIUS
170 to a network.
7.2.1 Connecting the CS-2 to a Network

The CS-2 is connected to a network hub using an Ethernet cable.
Hub (local network side)
Ethernet
RJ-45 board
7.2.2 Connecting the REGIUS 170 to a Network

The REGIUS 170 is also connected to a hub using an Ethernet cable.
7.2.3 Verifying the Network Connection

The following procedure is used to verify that each device is correctly
connected to the network.
1. Press the power switch of the CS-2 and start the CS-2.
Wait for the initial screen of the CS-2 application to be shown.
2. Press Operation switch of the REGIUS 170 to start.
3. Check that “READY” is shown on each LCD after initialization.
IMPORTANT If a network error is displayed on the LCD, the REGIUS

170 could not communicate with the JM.
“n” to “m” Connection
1. Press the power switch to start the CS-2 with the standard JM.
2. Check that the initial screen of the CS-2 application is displayed.
3. Press the power switch of the CS-2 with the backup JM.

4. Check that the initial screen of the CS-2 application is displayed.
IMPORTANT After the CS-2 application starts up, a popup message

may appear that says, “Trouble occurred with the JM. Call
for servicing. If there is a backup JM, switch to the backup
JM.” If this message appears, the application could not
communicate with the JM.
5. Press Operation switch of the first REGIUS 170 to start.
6. Check that “READY” is shown on the LCD after initialization.
7. In a same manner, start the second and other REGIUS 170s in order,
and check that “READY” is shown on each LCD.
IMPORTANT If a network error is displayed on the LCD, the REGIUS

170 could not communicate with the JM.

7-3
7.3 Installing Bar Code Reader

For systems in which cassette registration is set during pre-
registration, add an optional bar code reader (single or multi) to the
CS-2.
7.3.1 Assembling and Connecting the Bar Code Reader (Single)

The system stand for the single bar code reader (single) can be placed
on the desk or attached on the wall using screws. Discuss with the
manager for the institute in advance, and install the stand where it is
most convenient to read the cassette with the bar code reader.
1. When a synapse cable, USB cable is not connected to the bar code
reader (single), connect them following the figure below.
Connect the larger side of the connector of the synapse cable to the
bar code reader, and the smaller side to the USB converter
cable.
Bar Code Reader (single)
USB Cable
Connector(L)
2. Remove the flynut from the neck of system stand.

3. Put the screw from the neck into the screw hole of the pedestal, and fix
it using the flynut from the　bottom.
Holder
Neck
Pedestall
Flynut
4. Set the bar code reader (single) in the holder of the system stand.
Holder

7-5
5. Connect the USB conversion cable to the USB port(Type A) located on

the bottom surface and closer to the rear of the CS-2 Operation Unit .
CS-2 Control Unit
USB connector
Bar code reader
6. Adjust the angle of the neck of the system stand so that it is best
suitable for reading the bar code.
How to fix the stand The sytem stand can be fixed on the desk, etc. using screws(2 pcs) or
double-faced adhesive tape.
1. The inner diameter of the screw hole of the pedestal is 5.5mm (0.22
in), and the fringe diameter is 10.75mm (0.43 in). To fix using the
double-face adhesive tape, attach 3 pieces of strip (20.4 x 45.8mm) at
3 locations on the back of the pedestal as shown in the figure.
10.75mm
Screw holes for fixing
5.5mm
Position of double-sided tape

(3 locations)

7.3.2 Connecting the Bar Code Reader (multiple)

This type of bar code reader (multiple) can read the bar code despite of
how the direction of the bar code is placed. The bar code reader can
be placed on desk or fixed on the wall using screws. Discuss with the
manager for the institute in advance, and install the stand where it is
most convenient to read the cassette with the bar code reader.
1. Plug the USB cable connector in the rear port of the bar code reader
(multiple).
Multi bar code reader
USB cable
Connector
2. Plug the USB cable in the USB connector port (Type A) located on the
bottom back of the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• There are 4 USB connector ports (Type A) on the bottom back of
the CS-2 Operation Unit. When there is no USB connector port
available, pull out the port cover from the USB connector port on
the right, and connect the cable here.
CS-2 Control Unit
USB connector

7-7
3. Position the bar code reader (multiple) at the best convenient place for
reading.
How to fix the bar code reader Follow the procedures below to fix the bar code reader (multiple) on
(multiple) on desk or wall desk or wall.
Wooden screws for fixing are attached to the bar code reader
(multiple).
1. Fix the attached fixing plate on the surface using three wood screws
Note the direction of laser irradiation, and fix the plate as illustrated
below.
Wood screws
Fixing plate
Laser output direction
2. Fix the base plate on the bottom back surface using flat-headed
screws (4 pcs).
Flat-headed
screws
Base plate

8 Setting Up the CS-2
This section describes general procedures and
settings required for installing the CS-2 in different
facilities. For set up items listed on each set up
screen and not described in this chapter, refer to
Section 13, "Disassembly & Assembly".
8.1 Calibrating the Touch Panel

IMPORTANT Calibration of the touch panel is required after the CS-2 is
installed at the specified site.
1. Start the CS-2 and click [Return to Windows Desktop] on the REGIUS
Service screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details
of how to open the REGIUS Service screen.
2. Click [Start] at the lower right corner of the screen and select "All
Programs (P)", "TouchWare" and "TouchWare", in that order.
3. Click [Calibrate (C)].

8-1
4. A calibration illustration apears at the lower left corner of the LCD

screen. Use your finger to touch the illustration and keep touching until
the display says "Touch Enable".
IMPORTANT Do not use the pad of your finger to press the center of
the X mark; instead use the tip. Match the height of the
visual line to perform calibration with the visual line of the
user to operate the CS-2.
IMPORTANT "HOLD" is displayed and then "Touch Enable".
5. The calibration illustration appears on the lower right corner of the LCD
screen. Touch the illustration as described in Step 4.
6. The following warning screen appears. Follow the instructions and wait
for the next screen.
7. When the touch screen data is saved, the following screen appears.
According to the instructions on the screen, check that the cursor
follows when you move your finger, then click [Exit].

8. Click [Done].
9. Click [Start] in the lower left hand corner of the screen and then click
"Shutdown options (U)" from the displayed menu.
10. Click [Restart (R)] to restart Windows.

8-3
8.2 Backing Up the Original Settings

Before making various settings, you can save the system information
on a floppy disk so that the original settings can be restored in case
settings are made incorrectly.
1. Start the CS-2 and start the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service
screen. Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for details of how
to open the REGIUS Service screen.
2. In the Service Tool (Console) screen, click the [Backup] button.

The Service Tool (Backup) screen appears.
3. Click [System] of “System”.

“System Setup File Save” screen appears.

4. Click [>>].
All items in the left column will be listed in the right column.
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive slot.
6. Click [Save].
“Browse for Folder” screen appears.
7. Confirming that “3½ Floppy (A:)” is selected, click [OK].

8. Click [Yes].
“Saving......” dialog appears.
9. After confirming that saving has been completed, click [Exit] --> [Yes].
Switches to "Service Tool (Back Up)" screen.
10. Back up the license file. Start Explorer and switch to

C:\KonicaMinolta\CS-2\Env\System.
11. From the displayed files, copy KddLicensed(.txt) to the floppy.
12. When copy is completed, quit Explorer and remove the floppy.

8-5
8.3 Setting the System Properties

Set properties essential to the general configuration of the system.
• In this paragraph, the setting that is essential at the time of installa-
tion is described. For the other system property settings, refer to
Section 15, "Service Tool Screens".
8.3.1 Setting the Facility/Device Properties

Input the information of facility and CS-2.
1. Click the [Console] button in the Service Tool (Backup) screen.

2. Click [System Info.] of [System].

“SYSTEM INFO” screen appears.
3. Enter the facility name and street address in the facility information
field.
The items input here will be printed as Stamp on the film. Input the
Institution name, department in discussion with the system manager of
Institution
4. Select [Regius Info.] from the menu in the left column.
5. Input the date of installation in “Y”, “M”, “D” fields of “Shipping Date”.

8.3.2 Setting the System Configuration (Host • Printer)

Set the configuration of the host • printers that are connected to the
CS-2.
1. Select “System Configuration (Host, Printer)” from the menu on the left.
2. Check the check box for “Registered” of “Host” as many as hosts that
are connected to the CS-2.
IMPORTANT Host 2 is optional.
An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license or HOST

Output Addition license is required to turn ON the "Registered"
checkbox.
3. Input the host name in the “Model” field for the host that is set to
“Registered”.
4. Check the check box for “Registered” next to the “Printer” field for the
printers CS sends print data to.
5. Input the printer name in “Model” of the host that is set to “Registered” .

8-7
8.3.3 Setting the System Configuration (RIS)

Set the RIS and options that will be connected to the CS-2.
1. Select “System (RIS)” from the menu in the left.
2. Check “Registered” of “RIS Config.(Patien/Study.)” according to the

RIS configuration from which the CS-2 receives Patient/Study Info.
IMPORTANT RIS (Patient/Study.) is optional.

checkbox.
3. Input the name in “Model” of the RIS that is set in the “Device
Registered” field.
4. Check the check box of “RIS (Result)” according to the RIS

configuration to which the CS-2 sends the examination result.
IMPORTANT RIS (Result) is optional.

checkbox.
5. Input in the “Model” box the name of the RIS that is checked as
“Registered”.
6. After completing input, click “Save & Exit”

7. Click “Yes”.
Switches to “Service Tool” (Console) screen.

8.3.4 Setting the appointment information

Set essential appointment items.
1. Select "Appointment Info." from the menu on the left.
2. Set essential appointment items from the drop down menu for
"Essential appointment item" of "Appointment". By default, it is set to
"None".
8.3.5 Setting the Initial Screen

This section describes how to set the initial screen (this is the starting
screen for the routine work and is displayed the startup procedure is
completed).
1. Click [Screen Setting] of "System".

The Screen Setting screen appears.

8-9
2. Click [Localize] of "General Setup".

The General Setup screen appears.
3. In the Screen settings area, set the default screen from the Default
Screen drop down menu.
The factory setting is "Amendment screen".
4. Click [Save & Exit].

5. Click [Yes].
The Service Tool (Console) screen reappers.
8.3.6 Setting Density and Contrast Adjustment Amount

Set the adjustment amount used when you touch the density and
contrast fine adjustment button for the image confirmation screen.
1. Click [Layout] of "System".

The Screen Setting screen appears.

2. Click [Confirm image] of "Details".

The Confirm Image screen appears.
3. Set the adjustment amount used when you touch the fine adjustment
button of density from the drop down menu of "S value adjustment
amount" of "Image display/Image confirmation". The factory setting is
"0.05".
4. Set the adjustment amount used when you touch once the fine
adjustment button of contrast from the drop down menu of "G value
adjustment amount" of "Image display/Image confirmation". The
factory setting is "0.05".
IMPORTANT We recommend the following S and G value adjustment

amount be used depending on the output device (printer,
Viewer/Server) used in the institution.)
S value adjustment G value adjustment
Printer 0.02 0.02
Viewer/Server 0.05 0.05
5. Click [Save & Exit]

6. Click [Yes].
The Service Tool (Console) screen reppears.

8-11
8.4 Setting the Printer Information

Make settings for connecting between the CS-2 and a printer.
1. Click [Printer] of “Input/Output” in the Service Tool (Console) screen.

“PRINTER INFO • Command” screen appears.
2. From the menu on the upper left, select the category that will be set.
The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.2, "Setting the Sys-
tem Configuration (Host • Printer)".
3. Select the printer type corresponding to the selected printer from the
“Printer Type”.
IMPORTANT Make sure that the printer type is selected.
4. Set the “Commands” and “Printer” referring to the table below.
Items to be set Properties to be set
Presentation Selection of sending or not sending to the printer the LUT

LUT for equalizing the density between the monitor and printer
output.
Status According to the output printer, select from “OFF”, “N-

GET”, “N-EVENT-REPORT”, [N-GET+N-EVENT-
REPORT’.
Light intensity Select the method for measuring light intensity

Image When presentation LUT is OFF;

processing ･ D value output: Selected when a KonicaMinolta
imager that does not support P value input is con-
nected.
･ P value output: Selected when a KonicaMinolta
imager that supports P value input is connected.
When presentation LUT is ON;

･ D value output: Selected when an imager of other
company is selected.
･ P value output: Do not use this setting.
Note: When presentation LUT is ON, enter the values

measured by the luminance meter to the "lighting" and
"peripheral reflected light" fields in Section 15.6.7,
"“PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen".
Note: When the P value is ON, in addition to the above
settings, set the P value recieeve setting for the imager
and the "lighting" and "peripheral reflected light".
Icon Select the printer type. The selection here will be

reflected upon ;
･ Decides the icon displayed in the “System Status”
screen.
･ Decides the Dmax and Dmin of the printer.

8-13
5. Select “Basic TCP/IP” in the lower left menu.
6. Set “Basic TCP/IP” referring to the table below.
Host Name Make sure to input the printer information in discussion

with the system manager of the facility.
IP Address
Port Number
Timeout 1 Set the time-out for the printer to wait the request signal
from the CS-2.
Interval 1 Set the interval after the first transmission of the request
signal when several request signals exist.
Interval 2 Set the interval for confirmation of the setting when the
status acquisition is set to “N-GET” or “N-GET-REPORT”
in Step 3.
7. Select “Basic DICOM” in the lower left menu.
8. Set “Basic DICOM” referring to the table below.
Transfer Syntax Normally select the “Implicit VR Little Endian.

･ See Section 15.6.4, ""PRINTER INFO • Basic
DICOM” Screen".

Printer AE-Title Make sure to input the printer properties in discussion

Regius AE-Title
PDU Size Normally use the default.
Version Name Displays the implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”.

･ Unable to change
UID Displays “304.@”.

Character Set Normally use the default.
Private Date Normally select "Send".
9. When “N-EVENT-REPORT” is selected for Step 3 “Command” --

>“Status Acquisition” , select “N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” and “N-
EVENT-REPORT DICOM” in the lower menu column, and configure
settings by referring to Steps 5 and 7.
• Clicking [Import] displayed on the bottom right of the screen will ini-
tiate copying the setting made in Step 5 and 7.
10. After completing input, click [Save & Exit].

11. Click [Yes].

Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen.

8-15
8.5 Setting the Host Information

Configure various settings for the connection of the host.
• When the host is the device of another manufacturer, Configure the
setting following the instruction provided by that manufacture.
Beside images are sent in DICOM protocol and it is possible to send
JPEG images, etc. to an electronic medical record system via another
manufacturer's gateway (ID-680SAN module) mounted on the CS-2.
An Electronic Medical Record System Connection license is required
to use another manufacturer's gateway. In addition, a Host Output
Addition license is required to send images to two locations using
DICOM protocol.
1. Click [HOST] of [Input/Output] on the Service Tool (Console) screen.

“HOST INFO•Command” setting screen appears.
2. From the menu in the upper left, select the host type that will be set.
The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.2, "Setting the System
Configuration (Host • Printer)".
3. Select the host type corresponding to the selected host from the
“Host Type” .
IMPORTANT Make sure that the host type is selected.
4. Set the “Command” referring to the table below.
Gateway to Others To use the gateway program (protocol other than

DICOM), set to “ON”.
When "ON" is set, ID-680SAN module is used.
Image IOD Select the type of image data sent to the host
depending on the desgination host.
Storage Commitment Select “ON” when communicating with the Host

with regard to the Storage Commitment service.

GSPS Select “ON” when communicating with the host

with regard to the GSPS service.
Photometric Select the method of measuring light intensity.
Image Processing Select the method to process images to be sent to

the host.
5. Select “C-STORE TCP/IP” from the menu in the lower column.
6. Set “TCP/IP” by referring to the table below.
Host Name Make sure to input the host properties in discussion

IP Address
Port Number
Timeout 1 Set the time-out of duration before the CS-2 receives

the response from the host against the request signal.
･ Default: 60000
Interval 1 Set the interval after the first transmission of the

request signal when several request signals exist.
･ Default: 10000
7. Select “C-STORE DICOM” from the menu in the lower column.

8-17
8. Set “DICOM” by referring to the table below.
Transfer Syntax Normally select the implicit VR little endian.
HOST AE-Title Make sure to input the titles in discussion with the
system manager of the facility.
CS-2 AE-Title

･ Default: 65536
Version Name Displays implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”.

UID Displays UID “304.@”.

Character Set Specify the character set of the transmission data

according to the host.
･ ACSII : Alphanumericals
･ Latin1 : Alphanumericals including Latin alpha-
bet.
Private Data Select whether to send the private data or not.
DataSet Extension Normally leave it to “OFF”.

･ Refer to Section 15.7.4, "“HOST INFO • C-
STORE DICOM” Screen".
VR Check Checks if the syntax complies with DICOM standard.

If it does not comply, prohibits the data from being
sent. Set it to “ON” if the other manufacturer’s HOST
can not accept the data that does not comply with
DICOM.
9. When “Storage+Storage Commitment” is selected for “SOP Class” in

Step 3, “Command”, select “N-ACTION TCP/IP”, “N-ACTION DICOM”,
“N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP”, and “N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” in
order from the lower left menu and Configure the setting described in
Steps 5 and 7.
• Clicking [Import] displayed on the bottom right of the screen will ini-
tiate copying the setting made in step.5 and 7.

10. Select “Image” in the lower left menu.
11. Configure settings for the image by referring to the table below.
Image Reduction Mode Select the compression type when the image is
sent compressed. (default : SINC method)
･ Spline
･ Decimate/Crop
･ Bilinear
･ SINC method
If the default setting causes trouble, consult the
manufacturer for instruction.
Mag Request Mode Set the magnification from the following:

･ Magnify
･ Scale to fit
･ True size
Printer (Sync.) Select whether to reflect printer output condi-

tions (image processing, overlay, etc.) to the
HOST output for each item.
･ will be reflected to the output to the HOST.
･ Default: “E/F’H Process”, “Masking (Out of
Shutter) and “Masking(Side of Chest)” are
ON, and the rest is OFF.

8-19
12. Select “Output setting” in the lower left menu.
13. Set “Output Setting” by referring to the table below.
Queue Select an action when an error occurs during queue

printing.
･ ON: Skips the queue that incurred an error, and
print the next queue.
･ OFF: Suspends printing of next queue until the
error is reset.
SOP Instance Since the setting varies depending on the operation at

ID (multihosts) the institute or host, setting should be made according
to the instruction.
Storage Since the setting varies depending on the operation at

Committment the institute or host, setting should be made according
to the instruction.
14. Select "Output number of pixels" from the lower left menu.

15. Set "Output number of pixels" according to the following table.
Resolution ･ 175µm (standard)

･ 87.5µm (high resolution)
･ 43.75µm (options)
Output Pixel Size ･ Same as input

･ 87.5µm
･ 175µm
･ 350µm

17. Click [Yes].

Switches to "Service Tool” (Console) screen.
IMPORTANT When another manufacturer's gateway is set to "ON", the

ID-680SAN module must be set. When the CS-2 is
restarted, [Gateway] is displayed in Option" of the Service
Tool (Console) screen. The ID-680SAN module can be
set using [Gateway]. For details about setting, refer to
Section 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".

8-21
8.6 Setting the RIS Information

How to set the RIS information varies depending on the system
operation or system configuration at each facility. In this paragraph,
how to configure the setting when the RIS is individually assigned to
the patient/study and result as described in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the
System Configuration (RIS)".
In addition to directly obtaining patient information/study information in
DICOM protocol, it is possible to obtain information from medial or
electronic medical record systems via another manufacturer's gateway
(ID-680SAN module). An Electronic Medical Record System
Connection license is required to connect RIS.
8.6.1 Setting Patient/Study

Set the operational properties when the CS-2 acquires the patient data
from the RIS.
1. Click [RIS] of “Input/Output” of “Service Tool” (Console) screen.

“RIS Type” screen appears.
• It will not be displayed if only either of Patient/Study or Result is reg-

istered.
2. Click [Patient/Exam] --> [OK].

“RIS INFO” screen appears.

3. Select the RIS name that will be set from the menu in the upper left col-
umn.
The names shown here are those set in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the Sys-
tem Configuration (RIS)".
4. Set “Command” by referring to the table below.
Gateway to Select “ON” when using any gateway program (program

Others other than DICOM).
When "ON" is set, perform the settings described in Sec-
tion 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".
Service Class Select “Detached” or “MWM”.

･ Upon selection of “MWM”, an icon on
the right appears on the “Exam Search”
screen of the CS-2 application, and
enables the operator to touch it to ini-
tiate search of the patient data from the
patient database stored in RIS/IDS.
･ The user can search patient information in the Exter-
nal patient/Examination DB by touching this key.
• Selecting “MWM” will add set items for “MWM” in the left menu.
5. Select “TCP/IP” in the menu on the lower right column.

8-23
6. Set “TCP/IP” by referring to the table below.

Host Name Make sure to input the RIS properties in discussion
IP Address
Port Number
Timeout 1 Sets the time-out of duration before the RIS replies
to the data request sent from CS-2.
･ Change the setting if the default causes problem.
Timeout 2 Among the settings of time-out of duration before the
RIS replies to the data request sent from CS-2, this
particularly set the time-out before the CS-2 receives
the patient/examination data from RIS.
･ Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to
“MWM”.
Interval 1 Sets the interval when implementing the auto-search
of the patient data.
･ Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to
“MWM”.
7. Select “DICOM” in the menu in the lower left column.

When the “Service Class” is set to “Detached”,
unable to set this item.
RIS AE-Title Make sure to input the printer properties in dis-

cussion with the system manager of the facility.
CS-2 AE-Title
Version Name Displays the implemented version

“KC_CS2_1.00”.
･ Unable to change.

･ Unable to change.

9. When “Service Class” is set to “Detached” in Step 4, select “Detached”

from the lower left menu.
• When it is set to “MWM”, proceed to Step 11.
10. Set “Detached” by referring to the table below.
Auto Exam. Start Select “ON”, when automatically start examination

upon receiving an appointement in the initial screen.
11. When “Service Class” is set to “MWM” in Step 4, select “MWM” from
the lower left menu.
12. Set “MWM” by referring to the table below.
Search Set the condition to search Exam/Patient Information

from the RIS.
Exam Tag Select the method to convert the RIS study code to the
CS-2 exam tag. Also writes or reads the conversion
table in or from the file.
Refer to Section 16.3, "How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table" for a
description of procedure used to create the exam tag conversion table.

8-25
13. After completing input, click “Save & Exit”.

Confirmation dialogue will be shown.
14. Click [Yes].

Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen.
When MWM is selected Items used as the search condition in the patient information screen or
characters that can be entered depend on the settings in the server
(patient information database). When you select “MWM” for “Service
Class”, check with the system administrator and inform the user as to
the search method.
IMPORTANT When another manufacturer's gateway is set to "ON", the

ID-680SAN module must be set. When the CS-2 is
restarted, [Gateway] is displayed in Option" of the Service
Tool (Console) screen. The ID-680SAN module can be
set using [Gateway]. For details about setting, refer to
Section 8.8, "Configuring the Gateway".
8.6.2 Setting the Result

Configure the settings for sending the examination result from the CS-
2 to the RIS.
1. Click [RIS].
“Ris Type” screen appears.
• It will not be displayed if only either of Patient/Study or Result is reg-

istered.

2. Click [Result] > [OK].

“RIS INFO” screen appears.
3. Select the RIS name that will be set in the upper left menu.
The names listed here are those set in Section 8.3.3, "Setting the Sys-
tem Configuration (RIS)".
4. Set the “Command” by referring to the table below.
Gateway to Others Fixed to “OFF” when using the gateway program

(protocol other than DICOM).
Service Class Select “Detached” or “Performed Procedure Step

(MPPS)”.
• Menu items in the lower left column change in accordance with the
selection of "Service Class".
5. Select “TCP/IP” in the lower left menu.

8-27
6. Set “TCO/IP” by referring to the table below.
Host Name Make sure to input the RIS properties in discussion

IP Address
Port Number
Timeout 1 Set the time-out of duration before the CS-2

receives the response from the RIS against the
request signal.
Change only when a problem is observed by
default.
Interval 1 Use the default.
7. Select “DICOM” in the menu in the lower left column.

When the “Service Class” is set to “Detached”, unable
to set this item.
RIS AE-Title Make sure to input the printer properties in discussion

CS-2 AE-Title
Version Name Displays the implemented version “KC_CS2_1.00”.

Unable to change.

Unable to change.

9. When “Service Class” is set to “Detached” in Step 4, select “Detached”

from the lower left menu.
• When it is set to [MPPS] , proceed to Step 11.
10. Set “Detached” by referring to the table below.
Patient DB Registration Select whether to register the patient info that is

changed on the CS in the DB of RIS.
• ON: Patient info changed on the CS will also
be registered in the patient DB of RIS.
• OFF: Only patient info that is newly input on
the CS will be registered in the patient DB of
RIS.
Notify [Completed Study] Check “ON” to notify the RIS of completion of

the study. (default: OFF)
11. When “Service Class” is set to “MPPS” in Step 4, select “MPPS” from
the lower left menu.

8-29
12. Set “MPPS” by referring to the table below.
Send <Completed> Select from the following options:

None Sending: Sends only the exposure
start signal.
After Image Confirmed: Sends when [OK]
button is clicked on the “Exposed Image
Confirmation” screen.
After Output completed: Sends when the
output to the host or printer is completed.
Send Exposure Dose Cannot be set
Send <Discont.> as Cancel Cannot be set
Send Exam Body Part Check "ON" to send the exam tag altered on
the CS-2 to the RIS. (default : ON)
･ Enabled when “MPPS” is selected in
“Service Class”.
Continue on Other CS-2 Cannot be set
Send Film Consumption Check “ON” to send the film consumption

(sheets)
to the RIS. (default: ON)
Send Study Deletion Check “ON” to delete the examination from

reser-vation
list on the RIS when it is deleted on the
“Exam List” screen .(default: ON)
Issue SOP Instance UID Usually this item is kept to “ON”.
13. After completing input, click “Save & Exit”.

14. Click [Yes].

Switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.

8.7 Setting the Stamps

Set this item when the user requests that the format be changed.
Usually, use five default formats as shown below.
Default format
1. Click [Stamp] of “Overlay” in the Service Tool (Console) screen.

The Set Stamp screen appears.
IMPORTANT Do not deselect the "Valid/Invalid" checkbox.

8-31
2. Select the destination and stamp number that shall be enabled.
Stamp No ･ There are five formats for printer and host in com-
mon.
･ The stamp No. that is enabled will be also available
on the CS-2 application.
･ To use the existing stamp setting, click the stamp
No. on the “Copy” screen to copy its setting.
3. Select “Stamp Format” on the Screen Selection menu, and click [Edit].
“Stamp Format” appears.
4. Set the stamp details by referring to the table below.
Items Properties
Lines Input the number of lines for stamp. (1~6 lines)
Length Input the width (mm) where the stamp is displayed.
Line Height Input the height (mm) of character for each line.
Alignment Select from Left-Justify and Center(default).
[Reload] Displays the sample of current setting. Use this to check

the setting when changed.
[Preview] Displays the sample in bit map. Use this to check the char-
acter size, etc.
CAUTION “Lines”, “Length” and “Line Height” can be set indepen-

dently. Therefore, it may happen that the character line
does not fit to the stamp area depending on the setting. For
those items such as “Patient Name”, “Patient ID”, etc. that
are not fixed in character count, check that all characters
presuming the longest can fit to the stamp area.

5. After completing the change of display setting, click [OK] > [YES].
The screen switches to “Stamp” setting screen.
• Click [Cancel] > [Yes] to leave the setting unchanged.
6. Select [Detail] from “Edit Screen” menu, and click [Edit].

“Set Stamp” appears.
7. Configure the stamp settings by referring to the table below.
Items Setting
No. (1~60) Select Enable/Disable for each item. The item not selected
(disabled) will not show on the screen.
･ The items on No.41 onward is for setting of special char-
acters. Specially for imputing the title, etc.
Item Select the item from drop down menu. (refer to A-2 Stamp
Item Selection List, p.444).
Position Specifies the starting line of display (vertical) by line (line

Row counts from the top).
Position ･ Specifies the starting raw of display (horizontal) by raw

Column (character counts from the left end).
･ When several items are set for one line, the item with
lesser numbers input will be displayed on the left.
･ When several items are specified by the same number,
the items with lesser No. will be displayed on the left.
Length Specify the display width of item by number of characters.
Options Select the display type when “Free-Selection for Each Item”
is selected for “Specified Name display”in Step4 . (refer to
Section 16.2, "Stamp Item Selection List").
Sample ･ No.1~40: Input the sample characters in each item that

String shall be exhibited on sample display(Reload) and bit
map(Preview) display.
･ No.41~60: Input the characters free from the item, which
will displayed on the stamp.

8-33
8. After completing the change of each item, click [Exit] --> [YES].
The screen switches to “Stamp” setting screen.
• Click [Cancel] --> [Yes] to leave the setting unchanged.

The confirmation dialog appears.
10. Click [Yes].
• Switches to Service Tool (Console) screen.

8.8 Configuring the Gateway
8.8 Configuring the Gateway

When "Gateway to Others" is set to "ON" during the procedures in
Sections 8.5, "Setting the Host Information" or 8.6, "Setting the RIS
Information", you must set up the ID-680SAN module.
IMPORTANT “Gateway to the Others” in “RIS INFO” is the optional

function, and needs “CS-1/3 Electronic Medical Recording
System Interface License” to enable the “Gateway to the
Others” by ticking “ON”. Set it to “ON” only for those CS-
2s for which the license was acquired.
1. Exit Service Tool and click [Restart] in the REGIUS Service screen.
2. When the CS-2 starts up, start Service Tool from the system menu.
3. Click [Gateway] of "Option" in the Service Tool (Console) screen.

The Gateway to Others main menu screen appears.
• Setting of image information linkage (host side): Storage controller

setting
• Setting of patient information linkage (RIS side): MWM controller
setting
IMPORTANT [Gateway] button will appear only after enabling “Gateway

to the Others” in “RIS INFO” followed by termination of the
Service Tool.
4. Refer to Section 8.9, "Recommended Setting by Maker/Product" for

details of how to configure settings.

8-35
8.9 Recommended Setting by Maker/Product

8.9.1 Maker/Product Relation Table
Maker Product
Patient information Sanyo Medicom Newve

linkage
BML Medical Station
Toshiba MEPIO
• With regard to linkage with makers other than the above, confirm details on
the KonicaMinolta MI common portal site.
• For patient information linkage with SRL Doctor's Desk II, the linkage
module is added to the Doctor's Desk II side and ID-680SAN module is not
used.
8.9.2 Patient Information Linkage

For the following items, use the default value.
Sanyo Medicom Newve
2B!
83%'B0=
" <^Sd[T
B>2:4C ! 382><
=TfeT 2^\\d]XRPcX^] <F<2^]ca^[[Ta <F<
2B!
D_^]bTPaRWUa^\ ATRTXeX]VcWTaT_[h 2B!bTPaRWTb 0__[XRPcX^]
A8B8=5>C2?8?
cWT2B!83%' Ua^\cWT=TfeT cWT_PcXT]cX]U^
7^bc=P\T
B0=aT`dTbcbcWT 83%'B0=\PZTb dbX]V382><
8?0SSaTbb cPaVTc_PcXT]cX]U^ P]P[hbXbÛcWT
c^cWT=TfeT SPcPP]SaTcda]b <F<
cWa^dVWB>2:4C cWTaTbd[cc^cWT
R^\\d]XRPcX^] 2B!
[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen
Gateway to Others Fixed to "ON"

Service Class Fixed to "MWM"

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting] MWM setting
MWM setting
Requesting side Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
AE-Title DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".
AE-Title for recep- Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
tion DICOM screen "RIS AE-Title”.
Port Number for Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
reception TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.
Receipt Computer Initial value of Newve. Change the setting if Sanyo Medi-
com requests so at the time of installation.
[Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen
Host Name Fixed to “LOCALHOST”

IP Address Fixed to “127.0.0.1”

8-37
BML Medical Station
2B!
83%'B0=<^Sd[T
<F<2^]ca^[[Ta
!
"
382><<F<
<TSXRP[ 2^_XTbcWTUX[T BTaeXRT2[Pbb 2B! A468DB
BcPcX^] 5C? ?PcXT]c31 0__[XRPcX^] (
0ccWTaTVXbcaPcX^] BTPaRWcWT
Û_PcXT]cX]U^Qh G<;â1<; _PcXT]cX]UÛa^\
<TSXRP[BcPcX^] 3^Rd\T]cb cWT2B!dbX]V
aTVXbcTaTS_PcXT]c FWT]G<;1<; 382><<F<
X]U^X]G<;
Uâ\PcfX[[QT Uâ\PcUX[TXb
R^_XTSc^cWT [^RPcTSX]cWT
R^\\^]U^[STaÛ R^\\^]U^[STa
cWT83%'B0= 83%'B0=bcPacb
P]P[hbXbÛcWT
UX[TcWT]aTVXbcTab
cWTUX[T^]cWT
83%'B0=31

[Console] > [Gateway] > [MWM Controller Setting]
MWM setting
Requesting side AE-Title Set the value s3et in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/StudyPatient/Study) DICOM screen
"REGIUS AE-TITLE".
AE-Title for reception Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.
Port Number for reception Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.


• According to the following procedure, share the

C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of the CS-2.
Sharing the FTP folder
1. Finish maintenance of the CS-2 and go back to the desktop screen.
2. Start Windows Explorer and go to C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN_E.
3. Right-click the FTP folder and select “Sharing and Security”.

8-39
4. Select both “Share this folder on the network” and “Permit change of
the file by the network user” checkboxes in the items related to sharing
and security on the network.
5. Click [OK].
6. Check that the FTP folder icon is as shown below.

Toshiba MEPIO


8-41
[Network Common Folder Auto Log-in Setting]

MWM setting
Requesting side AE- Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/
Title Study) DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".
AE-Title for reception Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/
Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.
Port Number for recep- Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/
tion Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.

• According to the procedure described in page 42, “Sharing the FTP

Folder”, share the C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of the CS-2.

General IF There are two types of general IF. One is maker-independent MWM
type (search from CS-2) and the other is a DETACHED type (register
with CS-2 from electronic chart, etc.).
General IF DETACHED type
2B!
83%'B0=<^Sd[T !
4[TRca^]XR 382><3TcPRWTS
?PcXT]cX]U^cWPcbW^d[SQTR^]ca^[[TSQh BTaeXRT2[Pb
<TSXRP[ cWTT[TRca^]XR\TSXRP[aTRâSbhbcT\Xb
ATRâS caP]bUâ\TSc^PUX[T_dabdP]cc^cWT
BhbcT\ :^]XRP<X]^[cPbcP]SPaS5C?UX[TUâ\Pc D_^]aTRTX_cÛ
P]SbT]cc^cWT83%'B0=eXPR^\\^] _TaUâ\b
U^[STa83%'B0=bT]Sb_^[[X]VbXV]P[c^ 3TcPRWTS
cWTR^\\^]U^[STa R^\\d]XRPcX^]c^
cWT2B!
2^_XTb
:^]XRP<X]^[cP <F<2^]ca^[[Ta 2B! A468DB
<TSXRP[8]U^ BcP]SPaS5C?5X[T " 0__[XRPcX^] (
BhbcT\?6 382><
2^\\^]5X[T BC>A064
8=?0C84=C ?PcXT]c31 BcPacbcWTTgP\

5X[T QPbTS^]cWT
TgP\SPcPcWPc
# cWT2B!
2^\\^]5X[T 2^_XTbcWT5X[T aTRTXeTb
BC>A064
2^]ca^[[Ta >dc_dcbcWT
9?468\PVT >dc_dcbcWTTgP\ 382><X\PVTc^
SPcPX\PVTÛcWT cWT83%'B0=
cPaVTc_PcXT]cX]
9?46Uâ\Pcc^
cWTcTa\X]P[ÛcWT
T[TRca^]XR\TSXRP[
aTRâSbhbcT\X]
_aX]RX_[TB0=
\PRWX]TbPaT]^c
dbTSc^bcâTcWT
X\PVTb

Service Class Fixed to “Detached”

8-43
Detached setting
Sending side AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/Study) DICOM screen “RIS AE-
Title”.
Receiving side AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/Study) DICOM screen “REGIUS
AE-TITLE".
Receiving side IP Address Fixed to “127.0.0.1”
Receiving side Port Number Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS]
(Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen "Port Num-
ber”.
Host Name
Not used
IP Address

General IF MWM type [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen

MWM setting
HOST AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
DICOM screen “RIS AE-Title”.
CS-2 AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
DICOM screen "REGIUS AE-TITLE".
Port Number Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study)
TCP/IP screen "Port Number”.
Host Name Fixed to LOCALHOST

IP Address Fixed to 127.0.0.1
• According to the procedure described in the section titled Sharing the FTP
folder in this section, share the C:\KonicaMinolta\ID-680SAN\Ftp folder of
the CS-2.

8-45

9 Adjusting the Brightness
of the CS-2 Operation Unit
9.1 Required Items
9.1 Required Items

• Luminance meter (Konica Minolta LS-100)
• Luminance meter cable (LS-A12)
• Chest front image
9.2 Preparation
Perform the following procedure by waiting for more than 20 minutes
after turning ON the monitor.
9.3 Measuring the display brightness

characteristics
1. Click [Adjustment] in the Service Tool screen.
2. Click [Brightness].
The monitor calibration software starts up.
3. Click [Option setting].

The Option setting screen appears.

9-1
9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics
4. Check that the Method setting is set to “Auto mode” and the Display
Reflection Luminance Measurement is set to “No” and then click the
[Exit] button.
5. Click [1] Measure Monitor characteristics].

The Auto mode screen appears.
6. Move the Auto mode screen so that the target (black square) of Auto
mode is in the center of CS-2 LCD.

9.3 Measuring the display brightness characteristics
7. While pressing the F button of the luminance meter, turning ON the

power switch of the luminance meter.
8. Check that display of the luminance meter indicates "cd/m2C".
• Check that there is "C" after "cd/m2".
9. Keep 1 m distance from the CS-2 LCD and set the focus to the target
on the CS-2 LCD while looking at the luminance meter.
• Focus of the luminance meter is not completed if the distance is
less than 1 m.
• If it is difficult to set the focus to the center of the target, set the
focus to the fringe of the target and then measure the center of the
target.
IMPORTANT Depending on the viewing angle, the brightness of the

LCD differs. Therefore, adjust the angle of the CS-2 LCD
to the actual angle that the user uses while looking at the
LCD.
Also, match the position of the luminance meter to the

visual line of the user when he/she looks at the CS-2
LCD.
IMPORTANT Check for reflected images in the target of the Auto mode
screen. Since light colors items such as white paper and
white objects near the CS-2 LCD can cause reflected
image, keep them away from the CS-2 LCD. Also, if
someone passes behind the CS-2 LCD during
measurement, the image may change. Therefore, be sure
not to change the environment during measurement.
10. Click the [Start] button.
• Brightness of target increases gradually.(dark → bright)

• Measurement value of the luminance meter is transferred to CS-2.
• After the measurement value is transferred, the CALIB.CRT and
CALIB_S.CRT files in
"C:\konicaMinolta\CS-2\Env\Manage\Crt_Lut"
are updated.
11. When the Auto mode screen goes away, check that no error is
indicated.
12. Turn OFF the luminance meter.

9-3
9.4 Creating the Monitor LUT

Create a LUT based on the measured display luminance
characteristics.
1. Click [2. LUT making for the display].

The “LUT making for the display” dialog appears.
2. Click [GSDF conversion(P value)] radio button.
• Selecting the conversion method
Conversion method Application

application
GSDF conversion Default (recommended)

(Input: P value)
Brightness linear ［GSDF conversion (Input:P value)] is used when

conversion the monitor screen is bright
(Input: P value)
Linear Not used with CS-2
Brightness linear conversion (Input: P value) requires entering of Light

box luminance L0, Reflection from film La, Dmax and Dmin.
For details, refer to Section 9.6, "Brightness Linear Conversion (Input:
P Value)".
3. Click the [Convert/Save] button.

The output designation setting screen for the monitor LUT appears.

4. From the pull-down menu, select the ch you want to use.
5. Click [OK].
The monitor LUT is created and the screen returns to the "LUT making
for the display" dialog.
6. Repeat the step.3. and 4. to select all devices for which you desire to
output the Monitor LUT.
7. Check that error display is not indicated and repeat Steps 3 to 5 until a
monitor LUT is created for all channels.
• Files such as P_1.lut, H_1.lut reside in the HDD of CS-2 will be
updated.
• The P_1.lut and H_1.lut files in "C:\konicaMinolta\CS-
2\Env\Manage\Crt_Lut" are updated. File naming rules are as fol-
lows.
P_a.lut a: Printer channel number
H_b.lut b: Host channel number
8. Click[Exit].
The Monitor Calibration Software dialog reappears.
9. Click[Exit].
The Service Tool screen reappears.
10. Close the Service Tool and click [Shutdown] in the REGIUS Service
screen.
11. When the power of the CS-2 is turned OFF, unplug the cable (LS-A12)
and then turn ON the power of the CS-2.
• Until the CS-2 application restarts, the new monitor LUTs are not
reflected.

9-5
9.5 Confirmation
9.5 Confirmation
9.5.1 Restoring test image
1. Prepare "REGIUS CONSOLE CS-2 TEST IMAGES (SMPTE Pattern)".
2. In the Service Tool screen, select tghe "Restore" tab and click the
"Image" button.
3. Click the "Browse..." button in the Restore image file screen.
4. Select a file and click the "Restore" button.
IMPORTANT Ｐ value images (images in the typeP170image folder)

are used to check host output and D value images
(image in the typeD170image folder) are used to check
imager output.
IMPORTANT Image processing parameters are "Basic LUT = LIN-01, S

value= 293, G value= 1.0, E/F/G/H processing is OFF".
IMPORTANT Do not change the processing parameters for the restored

image.
9.5.2 Checking Gradation on the host output

1. Send the SMPTE pattern image (images in the typeP170image folder)
of the P value from the CS-2 to the host.
2. Display the sent image on the CS-2 and received image on the host to
compare the gradation.
Check that the result is as follows.
• Gray-scale on the displayed image must look the same on the CS-2
and host.
• Either on the CS-2 and host, the contrast of each step of gray-scale
must look equally spaced.
• The area that is written as "95/100%" at the center of the test image
(there is a 95% density area in the 100% density area) must be
identifiable when looking at the CS-2 monitor. (The 95% area must
not be the same as the 100% area).
• There is an area where a 100% density area to 80% density area
are arranged in a line vertically in the SMPTE image on the CS-2
monitor. The difference in gradation in this area must be identifiable.
(These three gradation sections must not be seen the same way.)

9.5 Confirmation
Use the following table to check with regard to the addition explanation
by setting.
HOST Info. setting

Additional explanation
GSPS Image processing
OFF No processing Set the display LUT of the reception host must be as follows.
(Connected to ・ GP processing host: GSDF conversion (Input P value)
KonicaMinolta) ・ GP processing host: GSDF conversion (Input D value)
OFF D value processing Usually images look different when the reception host
(Connected to other) performs special gradation processing. (The overall monitor
display of the reception host looks whiter than the CS-2 mon-
itor display )
OFF P value processing The images look very close on the two sides.
(Connected to other) Even though the reception host does not support GSDF,
images look the same.
ON P value processing (When GSPS is set to ON, Image Processing is fixed to P

(Connected to other) value processing (Connected to other) and Photometric fixed
to monochrome 2).
Display LUT of the host shall use GSDF conversion (Input P value) in
all cases.
IMPORTANT When the host images are whiter than CS-2 images,
change the image processing setting from D value output
to P value output.

9-7
9.5 Confirmation
9.5.3 Checking Gradation in Printer Output

1. Send the SMPTE pattern image (image under the typeD170image
folder) for D value from the CS-2 to the imager.
2. Compare the film and image on the monitor.
IMPORTANT Always use Light box.
Since the result differs depending on the setting, check the result (con-
firmed items) according to the following table.
Printer Info. setting Imager

Image P value receive Film density Result ( confirmed item)
GSDF setting
processing
OFF D value output OFF Dmax3.0 ・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being lin-
ear. (Reference: Density value is linear)
・ It looks the same on the monitor and film.
Other than ・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being lin-
Dmax3.0 ear. (Reference: Density value is linear)
・ It does not look the same on the monitor and film.
OFF P value output ON Dmax3.0 ・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being lin-
ON D value output OFF Dmax3.0 ・ Gray-scale in the film is not visually seen as being lin-
In any of the cases in the above table, gray-scale on the monitor is not
visually seen as being linear.
The phrase "not visually seen as being linear" means that the 100%
and 95% areas cannot be differentiated or three areas from 100% to
80% look the same.
IMPORTANT When the result is not as described in the table, try

calibrating the imager.

9.6 Brightness Linear Conversion (Input: P Value)

The following screen appears when [Brightness Linear Conversion
(Input: P Value) is selected in the "LUT making for the display" dialog
for the monitor.
Enter the following four parameters.
Use the following method to measure the Light Box luminance L0 and
Reflection from film La.
1. Turn On the luminance meter and check that the display is [cd/m2].
Check that [cd/m2] is not followed by "C".
2. Turn On the Light Box.
3. Stay 1m away from the light box and set the focus of the luminance
meter to the surface of the light box.
IMPORTANT Focusing is not completed if the distance is shorter than

1m.
IMPORTANT Set the height of the luminance meter at the level at which
the user actually looks at the light box.
4. Press the luminance meter measuring button.

When the measuring button is released, the displayed measured value
is held. This value becomes the light box luminance L0.
5. Turn Off the light box and set the exposure film.
IMPORTANT Make the room brightness as close as possible to the

conditions under which the user actually usse the system
and measure the high density image part.
6. Set the focus of the luminance meter to the surface of the film and
press the measuring button of the luminance meter.
The displayed measured value is the Reflection from film La.
7. Turn the luminance meter power OFF.

9-9

10 Verifying and Backing
Up Setup Data
Reading the solid density image, check that the
image read by the cassette reader is free from any
defect.
Then, back up the set up data, and complete the
installation work.
10.1 Checking the Image

Reading the exposed solid density by REGIUS 170, check the image
using test tools.
IMPORTANT Refer to the CS-2 Operation Manual for operation of the

Image Confirmation and Examination Registration
screens.
1. Press the power button, and start the CS-2.

CS-2 application starts, and the initial screen will be shown.
2. Press the operation button, and start the REGIUS 170 to be checked.
3. On the CS-2 Operation Unit, input dummy patient information for

image checking purposes and go to the Image Confirmation screen.
4. Touch the square (Other) in the lower left corner of the body part
diagram and touch [TEST].
5. Expose the test cassette to produce solid density.
• Bulb Voltage - 80kV, 10mAs / Distance - 2m

• Align the long side of the cassette with the vertical direction of the
X-ray bulb.
6. When the system is set to “Pre-registration”, the bar code of the

cassette taken by the bar code reader is read. When it is set to “Pre-
registration”, the bar code of the cassette is displayed in the order.
When it is set to “Post-registration”, “1st” is indicated. Nothing is
displayed when “Auto-registration” is set.
7. Insert the cassette into the REGIUS 170.

As the image in the cassette is read, the image is displayed on the
screen of operation unit.
8. ［Touch [OK].

10-1
9. Touch [Exam. Completed].
10. Returns to the initial screen.
11. Touch [KonicaMinolta].

System menu will be shown.
12. Touch [Utilities] to start the “Service Tool”.
13. Touch [Analyze].

“Analyze” screen will be shown.
14. Click [Image].

Image-check software will start.

15. Select [Open (O)] in the [File (F)] menu.

[Open] dialogue will be shown.
16. Select “1.img”, and touch [Open].

Solid density image that is read by the REGIUS 170 will be displayed
on the screen of image-check software.
• Select the latest file(with the largest number) if several image file is
listed in the “Open File” dialogue.
17. Select [Density • Contrast (C)] in the [Display (V)] menu.

"Contrast" screen will be shown.
18. “Select [Profile(Horizontal) (S)] in the [Analysis (A)] menu.“Horizontal

Profile” screen will be shown.

10-3
19. Adjust the slider bar so that the difference between “Black” and “White”
on the “Contrast” screen becomes approximately 400 steps.
20. Drag the slider of the “Center” to right and left so that the unevenness
of the image becomes most evident.
21. Using a yellow cross cursor, select the entire image tracing its border.
22. Horizontal profile of the area that is enclosed by the cross cursor will be
displayed on the “Horizontal Profile” screen.

23. Check that the horizontal profile is almost flat.

If the image correction is not appropriate, this horizontal profile curve
will show a mountain shape.
ex) Profile with no correction.
24. Select [Exit (X)] in the [File (F)] menu.

Closing all windows, and returns to the “Service Tool” screen.
25. In a same manner, check the image read by the rest of all REGIUS
170s.
If a steep slope or winding is found in the horizontal profile, it may
mean there is an abnormality on the REGIUS 170. Take necessary
action by referring to the REGIUS 170 Service Manual.

10-5
10.2 Backing Up the Set Up Data

After completing the image check of the REGIUS 170, back up the set
up data following the procedures below, and complete the installations.
10.2.1 Backing Up the Reader Set Up Data

Upload and save to the CS-2 the settings and correction data saved in
the connected REGIUS 170.
1. Using a mouse or touch panel, open the “REGIUS Service Screen”.

Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedures to open
the “REGIUS Service Screen”.
2. Click [Service Tool].

“Service Tool” screen will be shown.
3. Click [Reader].
“Reader” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.
4. Click [PCB].
“Reader Device” screen will be shown.
5. Select the reader whose set up data shall be backed up.

When REGIUS 170 is selected
1. Click [REGIUS 170 -> CS-2] in the [PCB] screen.

The set up data will be uploaded to the CS-2 from the REGIUS 170.
2. Touch [Exit].
The PCB screen screen closes, and switches to the “Reader” screen.
Repeat Step 3 onward in Section 10.2.1, "Backing Up the Reader Set
Up Data", and back up the set up data on all REGIUS 170s on the
CS-2.
10.2.2 Back Up of CS-2 Set Up Data

IMPORTANT Using the floppy disk on which a specific CS-2 has been
backed up, you can restore the same set ups on the other
CS-2. However, note that an error will occur if the restored
CS-2 is interfaced to the same network as the original
because the set ups unique to the original CS-2 are also
restored on the other CS-2. If such happens, disconnect
the restored CS-2 from the network, and set up the CS-2
uniquely from others.
Note that when the license file is restored on another

CS-2, the first CS-2 will no longer start up.
1. Click [Backup] of the “Service Tool” screen.

“Backup” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.

10-7
2. Click [System].
“Save System Setup File” screen will be shown.
3. Click [>>].
4. Click [Save].
A message prompting an insertion of the desk into drive “A” will be
shown.
5. Insert a super disk into the super disk drive.

“Browse for Folder” dialogue will be shown.

6. Check that “3.5 Inch FD (A:)] is selected, click [OK].

Confirmation screen will be shown.
7. Click [Yes].
Saving of the CS-2set up data will start.
Progress will be indicated on “Saving ....” message while saving
continues.
Upon completion of saving, a message to inform completion will be
shown.
8. Click [Yes].
Returns to “System Set Up Save” screen.
9. Click [Exit].
10. Click [Yes].

Returns to the “Service Tool” screen.
Implementing the above procedures will complete the back up for one
CS-2.
When several CS-2s are set up, use a different floppy disk to
implement the back up of set up data for each CS-2.
10.2.3 Deleting the Image Data

In the last, delete the image data for check and adjustment of the
reader by operating the CS-2.
IMPORTANT Those image data that is in queue to printer or host shall

not be the target data to be deleted.
Deletion should be carried out after confirming that all
image data has been output.

10-9
1. Click [Adjustment] of the “Service Tool”.

“Adjustment” screen of the Service Tool will be shown.
2. Click [Delete Image] of “Image”.

Browsing images stored in the CS-2, and “Delete Image Files” screen
will be shown.
IMPORTANT Images in the queue to printer or host can not be listed in

this window.
3. Click the first file in the top, and keep pressing [Shift] key, click the last
file in the bottom.
All files will be selected.
4. Click [Delete].
5. Click [Yes].
A message indicating “Deleting ...” will be shown while deleting. Upon
completion, a message to inform deletion is completed will be shown.

6. Click [Yes].
Returns to “Service Tool” screen.
7. Check that there is no image file left in the list, and click [Exit].
8. Click [Yes].
Returns to “Service Tool” screen.
9. Click [Exit].
Returns to “REGIUS Service Screen”.
10. Click [Shutdown] , and turn off the power of the CS-2.
In a same manner, delete the image data on all CS-2s that
implemented the reading of images.

10-11

11 Adjustment of
Cassette Readers
This section describes how to adjust the

REGIUS 170.
11.1 Checking and Adjusting the Image Size

Check the pixels in the main scanning direction of the REGIUS 170,
and adjust PLL setting if the result is out of allowance.
11.1.1 Checking Image Size, Read Start Position

Reading the cassette on the REGIUS 170, which is exposed to
produce solid density, and count the pixels in the main scanning
direction.
IMPORTANT For details of how to use the Examination Registration

screen and Image Confirmation screen, refer to the CS-2
instruction manual.
IMPORTANT With the CS-2, the Exam. tag for high-definition read
resolution (87.5µm) is not set by default. Before
performing this procedure, use Service Tool - Control -
Exam. Tag to change the resolution to high-definition.
After finishing this confirmation procedure, change to the
normal setting.
1. On the CS-2 Operation Unit, input a dummy patient information for the
image check purpose, then change to the Image Confirmation screen.
2. Touch the square (Other) in the lower left corner of the body diagram
and touch [TEST].
3. Expose the test cassette to produce solid density.
• Bulb Voltage - 80kV, 10mAs / Distance - 2m

X-ray bulb.

11-1
4. When the system is set to “Bar Code Registration”, read the bar code
of the cassette that is exposed.
When Pre-registration is set, the bar code of the cassette is displayed
in the order.
In the case of “Bar Code Registration”, bar code of the cassette will be
shown on the order bar. For “Manual Registration”, it indicates as “1st”.
With Auto-registration, nothing is displayed.
5. Insert the cassette into the cassette reader.

As the image in the cassette is read, the image is displayed on the
screen of operation unit.
6. Touch [OK].
7. Touch [Complete].
8. Touch [KONICAMINOLTA] and start Service Tool from the system

menu or open the REGIUS Service screen and start the Service Tool.
The Service Tool (Console) screen will be shown.
9. Touch [Analyze].
“Analyze” screen will be shown.

10. Click [Image].

Image-check tool will start.
11. Select [Open (O)] in the [File (F)] menu.

“Open” dialog will be shown.
12. Open the image data read in step 8.
13. Using mouse, count the number of fluorescent pixels(image pixels) in

the horizontal direction of the read image.
14. Check that the pixels counted in step 16 fall within the allowance
(4046pixels -5 ~ +10 pixels).
15. Select [View Size (V)] in the [Display (V)] menu, and select [No Pixel
Skip (N)] in the submenu.
16. Using mouse, check that the margin of H_sync(on the left side of
image) on the plate falls within the allowance (30 ~ 45 pixels).
17. Exit “Image Check” tool.

Returns to the Service Tool (Analyze) screen.
Fluorescent Pixel Size or pixels in the margin is out of the allowance,
adjust the PLL, read start position following the procedures below.

11-3
11.1.2 Adjusting PLL, Read Start Position
1. Click [Reader] of the Service Tool screen.

The Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.
2. Click [Device] of [System].


3. Select the reader on which the image is read, and click [OK].
“Ccu Device command Read/Write” screen will be shown.
To Change Pixels
1. Change the setting of “Regular (x1.5 speed)
Measured Pixels Setting of PLL Pixel Clock Count
Larger than 4106 pixels decrease
Smaller than 4091 pixels increase
• The relationship between the pixels of high resolution(87.5µm) and

PLL value would roughly be described as
1 pixel = PLL value x 1.3
To Change the Read Start Point
1. In “Code” and “Pixels (high res)”, input the direction and quantity you
want to shift the position.
• code + : shift the position toward H_sync.
code - : shift the position recede from H_sync.
• Pixels (high res) : input the value calculated by “pixels for required
shift x 2”
2. Click [Send].
Altered value will be sent to the cassette reader.
3. Click [Exit].
Returns to Service Tool (Reader) screen.

11-5
11.2 Unevenness Calibration of Regular Cassette

Whenever the optical unit of the cassette reader is replaced or starting
to use the REGIUS Plate with new version, implement the unevenness
correction following the procedures below.
NOTE Use the largest cassette that is used in the facility for the cor-
rection of the unevenness. The correction value will be invalid
for the sizes larger than the one used for the correction.
1. Using the condition shown below, expose a solid density image on the
cassette for the unevenness correction.
• Exposure Condition
Volt : 80kV (fixed)
mAs value : Set the X-ray dose so that the maximum data value falls
within 1500 ~ 3000 Step. (target)
Plate - Bulb distance : 2m or more (recommended)
X-ray bulb.

2. Click [Reader] of the “Service Tool”.

3. Click [Uneven. Cal.].

4. Select the cassette reader on which the unevenness should be

corrected, and click [OK].
• “Unevenness Calibration” screen will be shown.

11-7
5. Select the resolution to be corrected in “Resolution”.

Select “High (Auto)” (87.5µm) or “Standard” (175µm).
on the cassette using a bar code reader. The bar code data read by the
bar code reader will be displayed on the “Bar Code Registration”.
• When the system is set to manual registration, it is not necessary to
read the bar code.
7. Click [OK].
A dialog indicating the progress of the unevenness calibration will be
shown.

As the image is read from the cassette, unevenness correction is
implemented.
Upon completion of the uneven correction, corrected result will be
shown in the “Result” column.
9. Click [Exit].
The corrected result of the unevenness will be saved in the
unevenness correction table of the CS-2.
• For the unevenness calibration in normal case, Configure the

correction for both "General High" (87.5µm) and “General Standard”
(175µm).

11.3 Sensitivity Calibration of Regular Cassette

Sensitivity calibration shall be necessary to compensate the sensitivity
differences from one REGIUS 170 to the other when the condition of X-
ray generator device is altered.
NOTE Use the largest cassette that is used in the facility for the cor-
rection of the unevenness. The correction value will be invalid
for the sizes larger than the one used for the correction.
1. Using the condition shown below, expose a solid density image on the
cassette for the unevenness correction.
• Exposure Condition
Voltage: 80kV (fixed)
Standard X-ray Dose : 10m +/-2
X-ray bulb.
2. Click [Reader] of the “Service Tool”.

Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.

11-9
3. Click [Sensitivity].
4. Select the cassette reader on which the unevenness should be

corrected, and click [OK].
• “Sensitivity Calib” screen will be shown.
5. Tick the “Automatic Calculation”, and select “High-A” from resolution.
• Ticking and selecting the “Automatic Calculation” will automatically

create calibration data of “General Standard” using the calibration
data of “General High” (this means calibrations will be completed by
single exposure).
6. Input the X-ray dose that is used for the exposure in “Exposure Dose”.
on the cassette using a bar code reader. The bar code data read by the
bar code reader will be displayed on the “Bar Code Registration”.
• When the system is set to manual registration, it is not necessary to
read the bar code

8. Click [OK].
A dialog indicating the progress of the sensitivity calibration will be
shown.

As the image is read from the cassette, sensitivity correction is
implemented.
Upon completion of the uneven correction, corrected result will be
shown in the “Result” column.
10. Click [Exit].

The corrected result of the unevenness will be saved in the sensitivity
correction table of the CS-2.

11-11

12 Maintenance &
Adjustment
This chapter describes procedures for
maintenance and adjustment of the CS-2.
12.1 Regular Service Items
12.1 Regular Service Items

Items and intervals for regular service of the CS-2 are listed below.
Service Item Interval Procedure

Back Up of System Software Every 6 months Section 10.2, "Backing
Up the Set Up Data"
Replacement of Inner FAN Every 40,000 operation hours
Replacement of Hard Disk Every 5 years or 20,000 operation
hours whichever comes first
Deletion of HIPAA log Annually
Defrag hard disk Annually

12-1
12.2 Back Up & Restore of System Information

Regularly backing up the CS-2 system data in the floppy disk will help
restore the original system in case that the system data or CS-2 itself is
collapsed or damaged in accident or by mistake. Also it will help
investigate the cause of an error when it happens.
12.2.1 Back Up of System Information
1. Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen.

Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display REGIUS
Service screen.
2. Click [Backup] of the Service Tool (Console) screen.

The Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.


“System Setup File Save” screen will be shown.
4. Click [>>].
All items in the left column (System Setup File) will be listed in the right
column (Selected File for Save).
5. Insert a floppy disk for save into the floppy disk drive slot.
6. Click [Save].
“Browse for Folder” screen will be shown.
7. After confirming that “3½ Floppy (A:)” is selected, click [OK].

A confirmation dialog will be shown.

12-3
8. Click [Yes].
“Saving......” dialog will be shown.
A confirmation dialog will be shown when saving completes.
9. Click [Yes] of the dialog.
10. Click [Exit] to close “System Setup File Save” screen.
12.2.2 Restore of System Information

The system data backed up in the floppy disk can be restored by the
following procedure.
1. Start up “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen

Service screen.
2. Click [Restore] of the Service Tool (Console) screen.

Service Tool (Restore) screen will be shown.
3. Install the floppy disk in which the system data has been backed up
into the floppy disk drive.


“Systtem Setup File Restore ” screen will be shown. A list of files
stored in the floppy disk is displayed in the “System Setup File”
column.
5. Select files to be restored from the “System Setup File” column, and
click [>} or [>>].
Selected files in the left column (System Setup File) will be listed in the
right column (Selected File for Save).
6. Click [Restore].
7. Click [Yes].
“Restoring......” dialog will be shown.
8. After restoration completed, click [Exit] --> [ Yes].

Screen switches to Service Tool (Restore) screen.
9. Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.
10. Exit Service Tool screen, and restart the system software from the
REGIUS Service screen.

12-5
12.3 Back Up & Restore of JM Information

JM data base can not be saved or restored in the same procedure as
that used for saving or restoring the system information. Follow the
procedure below to Configure back up and restore.
12.3.1 Back Up of System Information

Following procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 that uses the
external JM or internal JM.

Service screen.
2. Click [Adjustment] of the Service Tool (Console) screen.

Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.
3. Install a floppy disk for back up into the floppy disk drive.
4. Click [Backup] of “Job Manager”.
Command prompt will be shown on the window, and back up will start.
The backed up data will be saved in the floppy disk under the name
“jm_backup.bat”.
After completing the back up, command prompt will close.

12.3.2 Restore of JM Information

Following procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 that uses the
standard or backup JM.

Service screen.
2. Click [Adjustment] of the Service Tool (Console) screen.

Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.
3. Install the floppy disk in which the JM information has been backed up
into the floppy disk drive.
4. Click [Restore] of “Job Manager”.
Command prompt will be shown on the window, and restore will start.
After completing restore, command prompt will close.
This completes restoration of the JM information. The device is
restored.
6. Exit the Service Tool screen, and restart the system software from the
REGIUS Service screen.

12-7
12.4 Upgrading the Version of CS-2

Upgrade should be carried out according to the procedures below
when the CS-2 Program newer than the one currently installed on your
CS-2 is available.
1. Start the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service screen.

Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedures to open
the REGIUS Service screen.
2. Click [File Import] of [Program].

“Install File” screen will be shown.
3. Insert the CD that contains a new version into the CD drive of the
CS-2.
The CS-2 installer starts up automatically and the Install wizard
appears. Click Cancel to quit the installer.
4. Click [ • • • ].
5. Select the new program version of CS-2, and click [Open (O)].
Switches to the “Install File” screen, and the file name selected here for
the “File Name” will be listed.
• The file name of CS-2 install software is ;

“PcProgx.xxRxTx” (x varies depending on the version)
• The CS-2 install file is stored under CD Drive: \route of the CD.
6. Click [OK] of the “Install File” screen.

A dialog indicating the installation process will be shown.
Upon completion of the installation, the dialog closes, and switches to
the Service Tool (Console) screen.

7. Click [Upgrade] of [Console].

“Controller Program” screen will be shown.
8. Select the latest version, and click [OK].

A dialog indicating the updating process of the program will be shown.
CAUTION Never touch the “Cancel” on this dialog.
Upon completion of updating, switches to the Service Tool (Console)

screen.
9. Click [Exit] , and then click [Yes] of the confirmation dialog.

Switches to the REGIUS Service screen.
10. Click the [Windows Desktop].

Right-click the [Start] at the lower left of the screen, and click the
[Explore (X)] in the displayed menu.
11. Click “CD drive” -> “Vx.xxRxx” (“x” represents the CS-2 program
version currently installed) in order in the hierarchical folder tree
displayed on the left of the Explore, then double-click [Versionup]
located on the right of the Explore.
Command prompt will be displayed and update of the CS-2 Program
begins.
12. Press [Enter] key of the keyboard after a message “Versionup

completed” is displayed.
IMPORTANT Several command prompts may appear depending on the

CS-2 Program. If other command prompts still remain on
the screen after the message “Versionup completed” is
displayed, wait until all other command prompts disappear
before pressing the [Enter] key.

12-9
13. Click [X] at the upper right corner of the “Explore” to close the screen.
IMPORTANT If “RmtGroup(.Dbg)” icon is located on the Windows

desktop, drag it to the trash box and empty the trash box.
14. Remove the cS-2 Program CD from the drive.
15. Click the [Start] at the lower left of the screen, then the [Restart (R)] in
the displayed menu.
CS-2 will restart. Check that the version displayed in the start up
screen of the program has been changed to the one of the updated
program.

12.5 Upgrading the Version of REGIUS 170

Update the firmware (data stored in CF and control program of the
mechanical control board) of the cassette reader.
To update the software version of the REGIUS 170, use the “Service
Tool” of the CS-2 that is connected to the REGIUS 170.
IMPORTANT Failure to update the software version of the REGIUS

170 may result in a situation where the cassette reader
will not be started up any more. Therefore, strictly follow
the procedure below.
Once the procedure for upgrade has started on the CS-2,
never implement other operation. Also to be noted is that
during the upgrade procedure, never turn off the power of
the cassette reader.
In case that the REGIUS 170 is unable to be started up,
replace the MCB, SCB of the cassette reader, or replace
the CF card followed by updating the MCB with the serial
cable connected.
CAUTION When updating the software version of the REGIUS 170 in

“n to m connection”, never operate the cassette reader(s)
other than the targeted one as well as the CS-2 for the
updating operation.
1. To restart, cycle the power (OFF/ON) of to all readers, CS-2s and

external JM (if present).
Shut down the backup JM CS-2
(not required for a 1-to-1 configuration) →
Shut down the standard JM CS-2 →
Turn ON the standard JM CS-2 →
Turn ON the backup JM CS-2
(not required for a 1-to-1 configuration) →
Turn ON all REGIUS 170s.
2. Start the “Service Tool” from the REGIUS Service screen.


12-11
3. Click [Reader].
4. Click [File Import] of [Program].

“Install File” screen will be shown.
5. Insert the floppy disk that contains a new software version for the
cassette reader into the floppy disk drive of the CS-2.
6. Click [ • • • ].
7. Select the new program version of Cassette Reader Install File, and
click [Open (O)].
Switches to the “Install File” screen, and the file name selected here for
the “File Name” will be listed.
• The file name of Cassette Reader Install software is ;

“CcuProgxx.xxRxx.Txx.lzh” (x varies depending on the version)

8. Click [OK] of the [Install File].

A dialog indicating the installation process will be shown.
Upon completion of the installation, the dialog closes, and switches to
the Service Tool (Reader) screen.
9. Click [Upgrade] of [Program].

10. Select the reader device that you want to upgrade, and click [OK].
“Reader Program” screen will be shown.
11. Select the latest version, and click [OK].

A dialog indicating the updating process of the program will be shown.
• Program change will be implemented in order of update of CF card

--> MCB firmware rewrite. It takes 3 to 4 minutes to complete the
program change.
IMPORTANT Never touch the “Cancel” on this dialog. Neither attempt

to implement any operation on the CS-2.
IMPORTANT Never turn off the power of the cassette reader(s).
Upon completion of updating, the dialog indicating the progress closes,

and a dialog to indicate the completion of updating will be shown.

12-13
12. Click [Yes].

Switches to the Service Tool (Reader) screen.
13. Restart the cassette reader which has been updated.

When “READY” appears on the LCD of the cassette reader after
completing the restart, upgrading is successful.
The program version currently running on the cassette reader can be
verified on the “Version” of the “Reader Program” screen. (refer to step
9 through 10 to open the “Reader Program” screen)
14. Start the “PostgreSQL access” of the JM, and check on the “r_version”
screen that the version and updated data of the REGIUS 170 have
been updated.
• Refer to Section 15.32.1, "“Network Diagnosis” Screen" for the
procedure to operate “r_version” screen of PostgreSQL access.
When several REGIUS 170s are connected to the system, upgrade

each REGIUS 170 in a same manner.

12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation Unit
12.6 Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation

Unit
This section describes the adjustment that makes images displayed on
the CS-2 Operation Unit becoming close to the one on the Host or
printer.
Make this adjustment when it becomes necessary to adjust the
brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• At the time when CS-2(s) is installed.
• When the luminance changes apparently due to the degradation of
the CS-2 Operation Unit.
• When the standard viewer is replaced or changed.
• When the CS-2 Operation Unit is replaced.
• When the target printer is changed.
12.6.1 Adjusting the Brightness

Refer to Section 9, "Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation
Unit".

12-15

Calibrate the touch panel of the CS-2 Operation Unit. Perform this
adjustment when the touched position does not match the mouse
cursor position.
12.7.1 Calibration
Refer to Section 8.1, "Calibrating the Touch Panel".

12.8 Restore the Original JM from Back Up JM

When there is a back up JM installed in the system, switch over from
standard JM to back up JM can be managed by user in a simple
manner.
However, switch over from back up JM to standard JM after the
standard JM has resumed normal function can not be managed by
user. It needs “Service Tool” to implement the switch over.
12.8.1 Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM

This procedure should be carried out on the CS-2 for standard JM.
1. Replace or repair the faulty JM.
2. Start up the standard JM, and start “Service Tool” from the REGIUS
Service screen.
Service screen.
3. Restore the system information and JM data base.

Refer to Sections 12.2.2, "Restore of System Information" and 12.3.2,
"Restore of JM Information".
4. Click [Adjustment] of Service Tool screen.
5. Click [Configure] of “Job Manager”.

12-17
PostgreSQL access tool will start.
6. Double-click [c_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool.

“c_status” screen will be shown.
7. Check that “c_stat” value for each CS-2 is set to “2”.
• If it is not set to “2”, click the figure, and input “2”.
8. After verifying the number, click [Close].
9. Double-click [r_status] of “PostgreSQL access” tool.

“r_status” screen will be shown.
10. Check that “r_stat” value for each REGIUS 170 is set to “2”.
• If it is not set to “2”, click the figure, and input “2”.

11. After verifying the number, click [Close].
12. Click “Database” menu on “PostgreSQL access” screen, and select

[Exit].
“PostgreSQL access” tool will close, and switches to the Service Tool
screen.
13. Click [Back] of Service Tool screen, then click [Yes] in the confirmation
dialog.
Screen switches to the REGIUS Screen.
14. Click [Return to Windows Desktop].
15. Open the "C:\KonicaMinolta\JM\control"folder and double-click the

[job_clear] icon.
Command prompt appears for a moment, and all jobs within the JM will
be cleared.
16. Click [Shutdown (U)] to shut down the CS-2 for the standard JM..
12.8.2 Switch Over to Standard JM

This operation shall be implemented on one CS-2 backup JM
connected to the network. The information of JM switch over will be
automatically delivered to other REGIUS 170 connected to the
network.

12-19
1. Connect a standard JM to the network, and start up all CS-2(s) and

REGIUS 170(s) connected to the network.
2. Operating a backup JM on one of CS-2(s), and start “Service Tool”

from the REGIUS Service screen.
Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" to display the REGIUS
Service screen.
Service Tool (Console) screen will be shown.
3. Click [Job Manager] of “Input/Output”.

“JOBM INFO • Job Manager” screen will be shown.

4. Select “Back to Standard” in the left menu column.

“JOBM INFO (JobMInf.ini.)” screen will be shown.
5. Click “Permit to Change JM” box to enable the change.
6. Click [Save & Exit] , then click [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.
Screen switches to the Service Tool (Console) screen.
7. Click [Back] and then [Yes] in the confirmation dialog.

Screen switches to the REGIUS Service screen.
8. Click [CS-2] to start the CS-2 application.
9. Click [KONICAMINOLTA] of initial screen (“Examination List” or

“Examination Search” screen.
System Menu will be shown.

12-21
10. Click [Device Status].

“Device Status” screen will be shown.
11. Click [JM] below REGIUS170.

“JM Status Check” screen will be shown.

12. Click [Standard LOCALHOST] , then [OK].

13. Click [Yes].

A message to confirm start up of CS-2, REGIUS 170.
14. Check that all CS-2s and REGIUS 170s that are connected to the
system have started up, then click [YES].
IMPORTANT At this stage, if there is any CS-2 or REGIUS 170 that is

not yet started can not receive the JM switch over
information. Always check that all of those connected to
the system have been started up.

12-23
Switch over of the JM took place, and confirmation dialog will be

shown.
15. Click [YES] , and restart all REGIUS 170s that are connected to the
system.
Carrying out the above procedure completes the switch over of the JM
has completed.
• Configure a test reading on all CS-2s and REGIUS 170s, and verify
that the standard JM is operating normal.
• After verifying the standard JM’s operation, initialize the back up JM
according to the same procedure as described in Section 12.8.1,
"Preparation & Initialization of Standard JM".

13 Disassembly & Assembly
This chapter describes disassembly and assembly

of the CS-2.
13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and Connector
13.1 Confirming the Position of Control and

Connector
Refer to Sections 1.1, "Specifications" and 1.3, "Equipment Used" to
check the position of the control and connector located at the front and
rear of the Control Unit.
13.2 Removing the Cover

1. Remove all media (diskette, CD and tape) from the drive, close the
operating system and turn OFF all connected devices and the
computer.
2. Unplug all power cords from the output.
3. Disconnect all of the cables connected to the computer.
IMPORTANT Cables include power cord, I/O cable and all other cables
connected to the computer.
4. Remove the pedestal if attached.
5. Unlock the cover if the cover lock is attached.
6. As shown in the figure, push the two buttons to lift the top cover
upward.

13-1
13.3 Component
13.3 Component
13.3.1 Component Position
Check the position of components in the computer.
1. Diskette drive lock

2. DIMM (memory) connector (x2)
3. Battery
4. PCI riser
5. Power mechanism assembly
6. CD or DVD drive (hard disk drive is located under the DC drive)
7. CD or DVD device lock
13.3.2 Access to System Board Components and Drive

To access some components on the system board such as the
memory, battery and CMOS delete/BIOS recovery jumper, you need to
lift the drive upward. You can use the same procedure to access the
drive to replace with other drive or update to larger capacity drive.
1. Turn OFF the computer.
2. Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover".)

13.3 Component
3. Turn the drive upward as shown in the figure.
IMPORTANT Make sure that the position of the cable disconnected

from the drive or system board is understood.
4. If the PCI adaptor is attached, remove the PCI riser and adaptor card.
IMPORTANT Do not remove the adaptor from the riser card.

13-3
13.4 Identifying System Board Parts
13.4 Identifying System Board Parts

The system board (also known as planar or mother board) is the center
circuit board of the computer. This board provides basic computer
functions and supports various devices.
Parts on the system board
1. Fan connector (x2)

2. DIMM connector (x2)
3. Serial ATA1IDE and serial ATA2IDE hard disk drive connector (x2)
4. PCI riser connector
5. Battery
6. CMOS delete/BIOS recovery jumper
7. Speaker connector
8. POV card connector (some models)
9. Diskette drive connector
10. Front panel connector
11. Power connector
12. Parallel ATA primary IDE connector (HD and CD-ROM drive)
13. Power connector
14. Microprocessor
15. CD audio connector

13.5 Attaching Memory
13.5 Attaching Memory

The computer comes with two connectors used to attach the dual inline
memory module (DIMM) and can attach up to 2 GB system memory.
Use the following rules to attach the memory.
• Use 2.5V, 184 pin, Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Ran-
dom Access Memory (DDRSDRAM) and non-ECCDIMM.
• Use any combination of 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB or 1 GB (if possi-
ble).
IMPORTANT DDRSDRAMDIMM only can be used.
13.5.1 Attaching DIMM

1. Access the system board. (Refer to Section 13.3.2, "Access to System
Board Components and Drive".)
2. Check the DIMM connector position. (Refer to Section 13.4,

"Identifying System Board Parts".)
3. Open the clip.
4. Push the memory in the connector until the clip closes.
IMPORTANT Always align the cut-out of DIMM against the tab of the
connector.
5. When the PCI riser is removed, return the PCI riser and adaptor.
6. Return the drive to the original position.
7. Put the cover back.

13-5
13.6 Replacing the Battery
13.6 Replacing the Battery

The computer features special type memory that retains settings
(configuration) of the built-in (standard features) mechanism including
date, time, and parallel port assignment. Even though you turn OFF the
computer, these information is retained in active status by the battery.
The battery does not require charging nor maintenance during its
service life. Note that, however, it does not last forest. When a problem
occurs with the battery, date, time and configuration information
(including password) are lost. In that case, upon power on the
computer, an error message appears.
1. Refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts" to check the

location of the battery.
2. Remove the PCI riser and PCI adaptor that are obstacles when
handling the battery.
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Attach the new battery.
5. If you have removed the PCI riser, attach the PCI riser and
adaptor.Return the cover and connect the cable.
IMPORTANT An error message may appear when turning the computer

ON for the first time after replacing the battery.This is a
normal status that occur after the battery is replaced.
6. Replace the covers in their original positions and connect the cables.
IMPORTANT An error may appear when the PC is turned ON the first

time after the battery replacement. You can ignore this
error because it usually happens after battery
replacement but does not cause any problems.
7. Turn ON the computer and all connected devices.
8. Use the IBMSetupUtility program to set the date, time and password.

13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive
13.7 Detaching and Attaching the Built-in Drive

The built-in drive is used by the computer to read and save data.
You cannot attach an additional drive in the computer but you may
want to replace it with a larger capacity drive or other type of drive to be
able to read other type of media. Type of drive that can be used with
the computer include:
• Parallel ATAIDE hard disk drive

• Serial ATAIDE hard disk drive
• Tape drive
• DD-ROM, CD-RW, or DVD-ROM optical disk drive
• Diskette drive and other removable media drive
To attach the built-in drive again, you need to make sure the type of
drive to be reattached.
The following figures shows a parallel ATAIDE hard disk drive and
serial ATAIDE hard disk drive.
Parallel ATA IDE drive
Serial ATA IDE drive
The following table shows various drive types and the connector used
to connect these drives to the system board. You need to connect the
power cable from the power supply system to each drive.
Serial ATAIDE HD drive Connects to serial ATA1IDE or Serial ATA2IDE connector
Parallel ATAIDE HD drive Connects to parallel ATA primary IDE connector
CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD optical disk drive Connects to parallel ATA primary IDE connector
Floppy disk drive Connects to disk drive connector

13-7
13.8 Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or DVD Optical Disk Drive
13.8 Detaching and Attaching CD-ROM, CD-RW or

DVD Optical Disk Drive
1. Open the cover. (Refer to Section 13.2, "Removing the Cover")
2. Turn the drive bay upward so that you can handle the cable. (Refer to
Sections 13.3.1, "Component Position" and 13.3.2, "Access to System
3. Detach the signal and power cables from the drive.
IMPORTANT A blue strap is provided to be used when detaching the

cable.
4. Unlock the drive. (See 1 in the figure below.)
5. Open the door in front of the drive, slide it to remove it from the front of
the computer.
6. Slide the part of the new drive into the bey from the rear.
IMPORTANT Set the jumper of the new drive form "Master" to

"CableSelect" and then attach the new drive.
7. Connect the flat cable to the new drive.
8. Slid the new drive to completely insert it into the bey and set the drive
lock to the lock position.
9. Depending on the type of drive to be attached, proceed to Section

13.2, "Removing the Cover".
Next steps
• To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant page.
• To complete reattachment procedure, proceed to the step to close
the cover and connect the cable.

13.9 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive
13.9 Detaching and Attaching Hard Disk Drive

2. Turn the drive bay upward so that you can handle the cable (Refer to
Sections 13.3.1, "Component Position" and 13.3.2, "Access to System
3. When the CD drive is attached, detaching the signal cable from the CD
drive makes it easy to handle the hard disk drive cable.
IMPORTANT A blue strap is provided to be used when detaching the

cable.
4. Detach the signal and power cable from the hard disk drive.
5. Pull the attached blue handle to turn the had disk drive and bracket to
the rear side.
6. Lift the hard disk drive and bracket to remove. Bend the bracket to
remove the drive from the bracket.
7. Attach the new drive to the bracket and insert the bracket in the slot.
8. Turn the drive and bracket to the front of the computer until they click
into place.
9. Slide the lock to the lock position.
10. Depending on the type of drive to be attached, proceed to Section

13.11, "Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive".
IMPORTANT If you separate the signal cable of the CD drive, do not

forget to reconnect the cable.
Next steps
• To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close the
cover and connect the cable.

13-9
13.10 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive
13.10 Detaching and Attaching the Diskette Drive

2. Unlock the diskette drive and slide the drive toward the rear of the
computer until you have enough room to handle the flat cable
connector on the drive.
3. Disconnect the flat cable from the drive.
4. Turn the drive bay upward to detach the diskette drive.
Attaching the new diskette drive
1. Slide the part of new drive to the bay from behind to insert.
2. Connect the flat cable to the new drive.
3. Slide the new drive completely to the bay and bring the drive lock to the
lock position.s
Next step
• To perform other optional procedure, proceed to the relevant
page.
• To complete reattachment procedure, proceed to the step to close

13.11 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive
13.11 Connecting Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive

1. Find the signal cable attached to the computer or new drive.
IMPORTANT To attach the parallel ATA to the Serial ATA Hard disk
drive, it is necessary to obtain the signal cable. This cable
is not attached to the computer.
2. Check the serial ATA connector position on the system board. (Refer to
Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board Parts".)
3. Connect one end of the signal cable to the drive and the other end to
the serial ATA1IDE or serial ATA2IDE connector on the system board.
IMPORTANT Connecting to either serial ATA connector makes no

difference.
4. Connect the power connector to the drive.
5. Return the drive bay to the normal position.
Next step
• To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close

13-11
13.12 Connecting IDE Drive
13.12 Connecting IDE Drive

1. Find the signal cable with 3 connectors that is attached to the
computer. One end of the cable is connected to the IDE connector of
the system board. Two drives can be connected to the other two
connectors.
2. Check that one end of the signal cable is connected to parallel ATA
primary IDE connector on the system board. (Refer to Section 13.4,
"Identifying System Board Parts".)
3. Connect unused signal cable connector to the drive that is going to be

attached.
IMPORTANT To connect the hard disk drive, always connect it the

connector at the end of the cable. Use the other connector
for the optical disk drive.
4. Connect the power connector to the drive.
5. If you have the CD drive audio cable (this does not come with the
computer), connect it to the drive and system board. For position of the
CD audio connector, refer to Section 13.4, "Identifying System Board
Parts".
6. Return the drive bay to the normal position.
Next step
• To complete attachment procedure, proceed to the step to close

14 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes CS-2 troubleshooting.
14.1 Error Message List of CS-2 Application

Error Nos and messages which may be displayed on the window
during operation of CS-2 are listed below.
Should the error repeat even after the remedy, back up the system
information, logs, JM logs in the floppy disk.
• Refer to Sections 12.2.1, 12.2.2 and 14.2.
14.1.1 Errors relating to hardware and software

Errors shown below are those that will be displayed on the window
when there occurs abnormalities with the CS-2 hardware or application
software.
Error No. Message Remedy

No Number Hard disk error. Call your field service engineer. Occurs when remaining memory
space becomes small. Occurs
when output data or RIS result-
send data piles up in the queue
as well as error with hard disk.
Check if the output or send-
result is OFF.
1000 Resource error [%s,%X] , restart. Restart the CS-2
1001 Resource error [%s,%X] , restart.
1004 Resource error [%s,%X,%X] , restart.
1005 Resource error [%s,%X,%X] , restart.
1006 Resource error [%X,%X] , restart.
1010 Resource error [%d,%X] , restart.
1027 Resource error [%X] , restart.

14-1

1051 Resource error [%s] , restart.
14.1.2 Errors relating to communication (Viewer/Server/Printer/

External patient/Examination DB)
Troubles which may be encountered in use of the CS-2 and remedies
are listed below. When the remedy does not help to solve the problem,
replace the CS-2 Control Unit.

1060 Faulty communication setting [%s,%X]. Call service engineer. 1. Check the communicating
1061 Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device. device on other side.
2. Check networking devices
1062 Communication error [%X,%X]. Check communicating device. and cables.
1063 Communication error [%s,%d]. Check communicating device. 3. Restart the CS-2.
1064 Communication error [%s,%d,%X]. Check communicating device.
1065 Communication error [%d,%X]. Check communicating device.
1067 Communication error [%X]. Check communicating device.
1132 Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer. Check the communication
1133 Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer. setting of the counterpart.
1134 Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.

1135 Faulty communication setting [%s]. Call service engineer.
1120 Connection rejected. Check status of communicating counterpart.
1121 Connection rejected. Check status of communicating counterpart.
1122 Faulty communication setting. Call service engineer.
1123 Faulty communication setting. Call service engineer.
1110 Connection rejected [X%]. Check status of communicating counterpart. 1. Check the communicating
1111 Connection rejected [X%,%X,%X]. Check status of communicating device on other side.
counterpart. 2. Check networking devices
and cables.
1112 Receipt data faulty [%X]. Check communication counterpart. 3. Restart the CS-2.
1113 Receipt data faulty [%X,%X,%d]. Check communication counterpart.
1124 Communication interrupted [%X]. Check communication setting and
communication counterpart.
1131 Receipt data faulty [%X,%X]. Check status of communication
counterpart.


1100 Reservation failed [%X,%X] [%d]. Check reservation data. Check the reservation
1101 Reservation failed. Check reservation data. information on which the
error occurred.
1102 Reservation failed [%04X,%04X] [%d]. Check reservation data.
1105 Reservation failed. Check reservation data.
1130 Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%d]
1150 Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X]. Put output queue OFF.
1151 Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X]. Put output queue OFF.
1160 Image data collapsed. Output disabled [%X,%X]. Put output queue OFF.
1140 Fail to save image data[%X,%X]. Check communication counterpart.
14.1.3 Error relating to output queue control

Errors which will be displayed when abnormality occurs on queue
control of CS-2 application.

1400 Inconsistent output queue control [%d,%X]. Call service engineer.
1401 Inconsistent output queue control [%s,%X]. Call service engineer.
1402 Output queue registration error.
14.1.4 External patient/Examination DB-related error

Errors displayed when errors occur in the External patient/Examination
DB

1450 Inconsistent X-ray implementation information[%d,%X]. Call service engineer. Check order
1452 RIS output queue registration error information from
RIS.
1500 Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s,%s,%d]. Call service engineer.
1501 Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s,%s,%d]. Call service engineer.
1502 Incorrect system parameter setting. Call service engineer.
1503 Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X]. Call service engineer.
1504 Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X,%d]. Call service engineer.
1505 Incorrect system parameter setting[%s,%s]. Call service engineer.
1507 Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%X,%X,%d]. Call service
engineer.
1509 Incorrect system parameter setting[%04X,%04X] [%s]. Call service engineer.

14-3
14.1.5 Errors relating to reading

Errors which may appear while the CS-2 application executes reading.

1218 Input patient ID. Operated by user.
1219 Input examination ID.
1220 Input patient name.
1251 Already reached limit of simultaneous reading.
1250 Setting of reading condition failed. Call service engineer.
1210 Register examination reservation. Operated by user.
1212 Image not suitable to reading.
1214 Failed to open image file.
1215 Reservation file deleted.
14.1.6 Errors relating to REGIUS 170

Errors which may be displayed when there occurs an error on the
REGIUS 170.

1252 Failed to acquire relative “jid” information from jobs. [%s] Restart the REGIUS 170 on
1253 Reading executed on other thread. jid=[%s] OrdrNum=[%d] which an abnormality occurred.
1254 Faulty read setting. Call service engineer.

1280 Reader error kick. Jid=[%s] Err=[%s].
1281 Image reading of ID[%s] , Name [%s] [%s] , Exam. Time
[%02d:%02d:%02d] failed. [%s]
1282 Error occurred. jid=[%s] [%s].
1283 Error occurred [%s].
• When an error occurs on REGIUS 170, refer to “REGIUS Service”

manual for how to remedy the trouble.

14.1.7 Errors relating to printer

Errors which will be displayed when an abnormality occurs on printers.

1170 CHECK PRINTER[%s] Check the printer on which an
2001 BAD RECEIVE MGZ error occurred.
2002 BAD SUPPLY MGZ

2003 CALIBRATING
2004 CALIBRATION ERR
2005 CHECK CHEMISTRY
2006 CHECK SORTER
2007 CHEMICALS EMPTY
2008 CHEMICALS LOW
2009 COVER OPEN
2010 ELEC CONFIG ERR
2011 ELEC DOWN
2012 ELEC SW ERROR
2013 EMPTY 8X10
2014 EMPTY 8X10 CLR
2015 EMPTY 8X10 BLUE
2016 EMPTY 8X10 DR
2017 EMPTY 8X10 DR CLR
2018 EMPTY 8X10 DR BLUE
2019 EMPTY 8X10 PAPR
2020 EMPTY 11X14
2021 EMPTY 11X14 CLR
2023 EMPTY 11X14 DR
2027 EMPTY 14X14
2030 EMPTY 14X14 DR
2034 EMPTY 14X17
2037 EMPTY 14X17 DR
2041 EMPTY 24X24

14-5

2043 EMPTY 24X24 BLUE Check the printer on which an
2044 EMPTY 24X24 DR error occurred.

2048 EMPTY 24X30
2051 EMPTY 24X30 DR
2055 EMPTY A4 PAPR
2056 EMPTY A4 TRANS
2057 EXPOSURE FAILURE
2058 FILM JAM
2059 FILM TRANSP ERR
2060 FINISHER EMPTY
2061 FINISHER ERROR
2062 FINISHER LOW
2063 LOW 8X10
2064 LOW 8X10 CLR
2065 LOW 8X10 BLUE
2066 LOW 8X10 DR
2067 LOW 8X10 DR CLR
2068 LOW 8X10 DR BLUE
2069 LOW 8X10 PAPR
2070 LOW 11X14
2071 LOW 11X14 CLR
2072 LOW 11X14 BLUE
2073 LOW 11X14 DR
2076 LOW 11X14 PAPR
2077 LOW 14X14
2078 LOW 14X14 CLR
2079 LOW 14X14 BLUE
2080 LOW 14X14 DR
2083 LOW 14X14 PAPR
2084 LOW 14X17
2085 LOW 14X17 CLR
2086 LOW 14X17 BLUE
2087 LOW 14X17 DR


2088 LOW 14X17 DR CLR Check the printer on which an
2089 LOW 14X17 DR BLUE error occurred.
2090 LOW 14X17 PAPR

2091 LOW 24X24
2092 LOW 24X24 CLR
2093 LOW 24X24 BLUE
2094 LOW 24X24 DR
2097 LOW 24X24 PAPR
2098 LOW 24X30
2099 LOW 24X30 CLR
2100 LOW 24X30 BLUE
2101 LOW 24X30 DR
2104 LOW 24X30 PAPR
2105 LOW A4 PAPR
2106 LOW A4 TRANS
2107 NO RECEIVE MGZ
2108 NO RIBBON
2109 NO SUPPLY MGZ
2110 CHECK PRINTER
2111 CHECK PROC
2112 PRINTER DOWN
2113 PRINTER INIT
2114 PROC INIT
2115 PROC OVERFLOW FL
2116 PROC OVERFLOW HI
2117 RECEIVER FULL
2118 REQ MED NOT INST
2119 REQ MED NOT AVAI
2120 RIBBON ERROR
2121 SUPPLY EMPTY
2122 SUPPLY LOW
2123 UNKNOWN
• When an error occurs on printers, refer to printer’s manual for how

to remedy the trouble.

14-7
14.2 Collecting the Logs

When a technical claim is reported from the user, collect logs using the
procedure described in this paragraph.
For the claim relating to CS-2 system:
Configure all procedures for log collection and back up described in
this praragraph.
For the claim relating to connected devices:
Configure all procedures for log collection and back up described in
this praragraph.
For the claim relating to image quality:
Configure the procedure described in Section 14.3, "Back Up of Image
(When technical claim reported)" in addition to all procedures for log
collection and back up described in this paragraph.
14.2.1 Collecting the Application Logs

Application logs are detailed operational history of CS-2 application
software. When an error occurs on the CS-2 application, collect error
date, application logs about the occurrence date so that it help
investigate the cause of errors.
• Implementing “Log” of the Service Tool Screen will save the
collected logs in the floppy disk.
• Application log and images may be too big to be saved in a floppy
disk. In such a case, save it on the hard disk once and then use the
write function of Windows to move the data to a CD from the hard
disk or directly save it to a USB storage device. If you save data on
the hard disk, always move it to the recycle bin and empty the
recycle bin.Also, if you use an USB memory, always disconnect the
device.
1. Start “Service Tool ” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of

CS-2.
Refer to Section 1.7, "Service Tool Screens" for the procedure to open

2. Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Backup) screen .

Service Tool (Backup) screen will be shown.
3. Click [Log] of “Log”.

“Log File Save” screen will be shown.
4. Insert a floppy disk for saving logs into the floppy disk drive.

14-9
5. Select the date of the log which shall be backed up, then click [Save].
6. Confirm that “Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK].

7. Click [YES].
“Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while saving.
• Since the log files in the CS-2’s hard disk will first be compressed
into a single file, then saved, it will take several minutes to
complete.
Upon completion of save, confirmation dialogue will be shown.
8. Click [YES] of the dialogue.
9. Click [Exit] to close “Log File save” screen.
14.2.2 Collecting the System Logs

System log can be used to reproduce institutions system configuration
and very useful for claim analysis.
• Executing [System] on "Service Tool (Backup)" will allow the system
information to be saved in the floppy disk.
1. Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen of

CS-2.

2. Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Console) screen.

3. Click [System] of "System".

The “System Setup File Save” screen will be shown
4. Click [>>].
All of the left side list items are displayed in the right side list.

14-11
5. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
6. Click the [Save] button.

7. Check that "3.5 inch (FD (A:)" is selected and click [OK].
8. Click [Yes］ .
“Saving......” dialogue will be shown.
9. Confirming that the saving has completed without failure, click [Exit] >
[Yes].
The Service Tool (Backup) screen reappears.
14.2.3 Collecting the Reader Logs

Reader logs are the information regarding the operational history and
hardware of the REGIUS 170 reader, history of errors and warnings,
and history of calibrations.
Although the reader logs are stored in the reader itself, they can be uploaded
onto the CS-2 using “Service Tool”.
■ In the case of REGIUS 350 • The reader log uploaded from REGIUS 170 can be stored in the
CS-2’s hard disk and floppy disk.

CS-2.

2. Click [Reader] of Service Tool (Reader) screen.

Service Tool (Reader) screen will be shown.
3. Click [Reader Log].

When there are several readers are connected to the CS-2, “Reader
Device” screen will be shown.
4. Select the reader device whose reader log should be collected, and
click [OK].
“Reader Log” screen will be shown.

14-13

7. Confirm that “3.5 Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK].
Starts receiving the reader log from the selected reader, and saved in
the super disk.
“Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while receiving the log and
saving.
8. Click [YES] after saving has completed.
9. Click [Exit] to close “Reader Log Info.” screen.
■ In the case of REGIUS 190/170 • The reader log uploaded from REGIUS 190/170 can be stored in
the CS-2’s hard disk.
1. Start “Service Tool” from system menu or “REGIUS Service” screen

of CS-2.
Refer to “1.7.1 Service Tool Screens” for the procedure to open the
“REGIUS Service” Screen.

2. Click [Reader] of “Service Tool” screen (Reader).
“Service Tool” screen (Reader) will be shown.
3. Click [Subsys].
When there are several readers are connected to the CS-2, “Reader
Device” screen will be
shown.
4. Select the reader device whose reader log should be collected, and
click [OK].
“Sub SystemLog Create” screen will be shown.

14-15
5. Click [SubSystemLog Create].

Sub log will be created in the selected reader. Upon completion of log
creation, a dialogue indicating the end of log creation will be shown.
6. Click [Yes].
Returns to the “Sub Log Create” screen.
7. Click [Exit].
Returns to “Service Tool (Reader)” screen.

“Reader Log” screen will be shown.

9. Select the device name selected in the step.4. again, and click [Get
Reader Log].
“Folder Browse” screen will be shown.
10. Select an appropriate folder on the desktop (Administrator’ s document

folder, etc.) and click [OK].
A dialogue confirming whether to save or not will be shown.
Collecting the reader log from the selected reader, and saved in the
selected folder. “Saving ...” dialogue will be displayed while saving and
receiving the log data.
11. Click [Yes] when save has completed.
12. Click [Exit] to close “Reader Log” screen.

Returns to the “Service Tool (Reader)” screen.
13. Click [Back] to switch to the “REGIUS Service” screen.
14. Click [Back to Windows Desktop] to display the Windows desktop.
15. Copy the files selected in the step. 10. onto CD-R.
14.2.4 Back Up of JM Logs

Back up of JM logs should be carried out in a way different from those
for other logs.
IMPORTANT When backing up of logs, collect application logs, system

logs, and reader logs before starting back up.

14-17

CS-2.
2. Click [Adjustment] of Service Tool (Console) screen.

The Service Tool (Adjustment) screen will be shown.
4. Click [Log] of “Job Manager”.

Command prompt will be shown on the screen, and log collection and
back up will be initiated.
Upon completion of back up, command prompt will be closed.

14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)
14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim

reported)
When a technical claim regarding the image quality such as
abnormality in image processing, unable to output individual image,
abnormality in image reading (unable to display all images, images
with noise) is reported, save the claimed image data in a super disk in
addition to system information, system logs, and JM logs following the
procedure described in the preceeding pages.
• Application log and images may be too big to be saved in a floppy
disk. In such a case, save it on the hard disk once and then use the
write function of Windows to move the data to a CD from the hard
disk or directly save it in an USB memory. If you save data on the
hard disk, always move it to the recycle bin and empty the recycle
bin.Also, if you use an USB memory, always disconnect the device.

CS-2.
Refer to for the procedure to open the REGIUS Service Screen.
2. Click [Backup] of Service Tool (Console) screen.


14-19
14.3 Back Up of Image (When technical claim reported)
3. Click [Image] of “Image”.

“Image File Save” screen will be shown.
4. Select the image which was claimed to be abnormal.
5. Click to select [All] of “Save Option”.
7. Click [Save].
8. Confirm that “3.5 Floppy Disk (A:)” is selected, then click [OK].
9. Click [YES].
“Saving . . . “ dialogue will be kept displayed while saving.
Upon completion of save, confirmation dialogue will be shown.
10. Click [YES] of the dialogue.
11. Click [Exit] to close “Image File save” screen.

15 Service Tool Screens
15.1 Service Tool Overview

15.1.1 Alternative of Starting the Service Tool
• Starting Up the Service Tool from the System Menu
When the Service Tool is initiated from the CS-2 application software, the CS-2 application program keeps
running on the background. Therefore, clicking [Exit] will instantly switches the screen to the application.
However, the set items that may affect the operation of CS-2 application will be concealed in order to prevent
troubles.
Start Up Procedure • • • • [Konica REGIUS] --> [Utility] --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678)
IMPORTANT Following three screens will be displayed only when the examinations are browsed from the “Exam
History” screen after starting up the Service Tool from the System Menu followed by returning from
the Service Tool to the System Menu.
Item Screen Function

[Learn] Image confirmation Density and contrast adjustment value at this time can be
screen immediately reflected in the image processing parameter.
Used when immediately setting the image processing parameters
in the Image browse screen favorable to the user.
ROI Image confirmation Displays ROI in a square frame in the X-rayed image.
screen
Processing name and Image confirmation Displays the processing name and serial number of the image
serial number of the screen processing parameter used for the image processing.
image processing (For the exam. tag key for which the subject auto-recognition is set
parameter to ON, the processing name and serial number of the image
processing parameter of the recognized result.)
Screen example when [Learn], ROI and processing name and serial number of the image processing parameter
are displayed.
Image confirmation screen Image browse screen
• Starting Up the Service Tool from the REGIUS Service Screen

When the Service Tool is initiated from the REGIUS Service Screen, set ut items will be displayed without any limitation. To return to the CS-
2 application, it is necessary to restart the CS-2 application from the REGIUS Service Screen.
Start Up Procedure • • • • [KONICAMINOLTA] --> [Utility] --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678) --> [Exit] --> [Shut-
down] --> [Yes] --> Select [Service Tool] in the REGIUS Service Screen --> input the Maintenance Password (default: 5678)

15 - 1
15.1.2 Summary of the Service Tool Screens

The service tool screen is a screen where all keys for starting the setting tools are classified depending on the
purposes. Service Tool Screens initiated from the REGIUS Service Screen is described below.
IMPORTANT [Gateway] is displayed in the Service Tool sceen when

“Gateway to Others” for RIS or HOST is set to ON.
Service Tool Screens Start Up Keys Descrip-

( : only available when tion
activated from the REGIUS
Service Screen)
[Console] [Layout] 15-5
[System Info] 15-14
[Job Manager] 15-32
[Printer] 15-34
[Host] 15-45
[RIS] 15-55
[Density] 15-67
[Stamp] 15-69
[Exam Tag] 15-75
[Process] 15-83
[Gateway] 15-89
[Patient DB] 15-92
[License] 15-97
[File Import] 15-96
[Upgrade] 15-96
[Console] > [Layout] [General] 15-5

[Exposure 15-7
Registration]
[Search Result]
[Exposure List]
[Image Confirmation] 15-12
[History]
[Statistics]
[Reader]
[Reader] 15-98
[Device] 15-99
[Std Current] 15-102
[Sensitivity] 15-105
[Reader Logs] 15-108
[File Import] 15-109
[Upgrade] 15-109
[Network] 15-110


Service Screen)
[Back Up] [System] 15-111
[Image] 15-112
[Hipaa Log] 15-113
[Log] 15-114
[Restore] [System] 15-115

[Image] 15-116

15 - 3

Service Screen)
[Adjustment] [Brightness] 15-117
[Delete Image] 15-122
[Delete All] 15-123
[Configure] 15-124
[Backup] 15-124
[Restore] 15-124
[Log] 15-124
[Initialize] 15-124
[Statistic]
[Analyze] [Ping] 15-129

[Image] 15-130
[App Log] 15-138
[Sys Log] 15-138

15.2 [Console] > [Layout] > [Localize...]

15.2.1 “General Setup” Common Screen
Key/Item Function
[Save & Exit] Click to exit from “DISPLAY INFO” screen after saving the settings.
[Cancel] Click to exit from “DISPLAY INFO” screen without saving the settings.
15.2.2 “General Setup” Screen ・ General

IMPORTANT In the case when the screen setting is changed, the
changes will not be reflected on the CS-2 application
when the restart is initiated from [CS2] of the REGIUS
Service Screen. To reflect the changes, either click
[Restart] in the REGIUS Service Screen or restart the PC
from the Windows XP desktop.
Start up from the system menu Start up from the REGIUS Service Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [Localize...]
Key/Item Function
Localize
Language Select a language to use with the CS-2 application.
“Japanese”, “English” or “Other”.
Date Select
“MM/DD/YYYY”or “ DD/MM/YYYY”.
Time Select
“12hour” or “24hour”.
Screen
Default Screen Select the initial screen.
Select “List”, “Input/Search” or “Amendment”.

15 - 5
Key/Item Function
Screen keyboard Select whether to change the keybaord displayed in the Examination Registration screen
to the language where the system is used.
"ON" .....Change to local language.
"OFF".....Do not change to local language.
PN Component Select
"Delimiter | | or “Delimiter |A|".
List Screen Select
“Search” or “Not Search”.
Patient ID Length Select
“1~32”.
Radiation Dose Select
“Input” or “Not Input”.
Align Mammo Image No use.
Reject Image Save Select whether to abort the rejected image or to keep it in the Console.
ON : Keep
OFF: Abort
Image Reject log Select wheter to allow the user to select the image reject reason or not.
ON : Displays a dialogue on which the user may select the image reject reason when
implementing the reject action. "NG Reason Edit" screen becomes available on the “User
Tool” screen, allowing the user to edit the reject reason.
Annotation Function Select whether to enable or disable the annotation function.
Always Indicate Select whether to display the character strings set on the “Annotation” screen also on the
other screen.
Character Size Select the unit to express the character size that is displayed on the “Annotation” screen.
Select from “mm” or “inch”.

15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration], [Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]
15.3 [Console] >[Layout] >[Exposure Registration],

[Search Result], [Exposure List], [History], [Statistics]
15.3.1 “QA Tool Column Edit” Screen
A screen to edit the items displayed on the Image analysis tool screen.
Start up from the system Start up from the REGIUS Service

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • •[Console] --> [Layout] -->Select [Statistics]
Key/Item Function
[Reject], [Exam.], [Console], [Plate], [Reader] Select the analyzing item to be edited from these buttons.
Selected = xx / All = xx Selected / All Selected : Number of items selected.
All : Number of items available for selection.
ListDisplays a list of display items which are currently set.
Select the item to be deleted or changed.
To add an item, select whether it is added before or after the selected item.
Up/Down Moves the cursor (highlighted item) in the item list up and down.
Append Moves the cursor (highlighted item) in the item list up and down.
[Append] Add a new item in the item list.
･ Displays Item(Append/Edit) screen.
[Edit] Allows to edit the item selected in the item list.

･ Displays Item(Append/Edit) screen.
[Delete] Deletes the item selected in the item list.
[Save&Exit] Click to exit from “QA Tool Column Edit” screen after saving the settings.
[Cancel] Click to exit from “QA Tool Column Edit” screen without saving the settings.

15 - 7
15.3.2 Configure Tool

This screen is used to set display specifications of the Examination Registration screen in accordance with user
requests.


menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [Study Registration screen]
Key/Item Function
Preset Button
[Preset 1 ~ 10] Select the display format that has been preset on the CS-2 in advance.
Selection
List Select the display position of the items. The figure on the left of the item name
indicates the display page and position on the screen.
Available Items Select the item which shall be displayed at the position selected in the “List”.
Detail
Sets details of set up for the item selected in the “List”.
The set items which have white back ground only are valid for change.
[Save & Exit] Click to exit from “Configure Tool” screen after saving the settings.
[Cancel] Click to exit from “Configure Tool” screen without saving the settings.

• Items available on the Examination Registration screen
List of Available items

Patient ID Name ASCII Name Kana Name Kanji Sex Birth Date/Time
Birth Date (Age) Patient Comments Occupation Height Weight (kg) Nationality
Alert Contrast Allergies Nationality Pregnancy Special Needs Patient State
Residence (Ward) Patient Location Patient Accession Number Study ID Medical Alerts
Confidentiality
Study Comment Scheduled Study Reason for Study Requesting Requesting Requesting
Start Date Physician ASCII Physician Kana Physician Kanji
Hospital Study Date Referring Referring Referring Recording
Department Physician ASCII Physician Kana Physician Kanji Physician ASCII
Recording Recording ASCII Radiologist Kana Radiologist Kanji Diagnosis
Physician Kana Physician Kanji Description
Study Name X-ray Room
Available Items - The List corresponds to the display position of the following Examination Registration screen.
IMPORTANT ＊ -2 item name is not displayed.
IMPORTANT When ＊ -2 is undefined, ＊ -2 area is not secured.

15 - 9
15.3.3 “Study List (Column Heading)” Screen

This screen is used to set items (columns) that are displayed on three screens, “Study List”, “History” and “Study
Result”, according to user requests. Settings other than the selection items are common to each of two screens.


menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [Layout] --> [List] or [History], [Search Result]
• Clicking on [Append] or [Edit.] will switches to the “Append/Edit” screen.
Key/Item Function
Preset Button
[Preset 1 ~ 10] Select the display format that has been preset on the CS-2 in advance.
Item List Displays a list of display items which are currently set.
Select the item to be deleted or changed.
To add an item, select whether it is added before or after the selected item.
Append
[Append] Add a new item in the list.
• Displays Append/Revise screen.
• Refer to the “List Display Selection Items” for the items available for addition.
[Insert] Add the item before the selected item.
[Append] Add the item after the selected item.
[Edit] Changes the display format of the item selected in the item list.
• Displays Append/Revise screen.
[Delete] Deletes the item selected in the item list.
[Save&Exit] Click to exit from “Study List (Column Title)” screen after saving the settings.
[Cancel] Click to exit from “Study List (Column Title)” screen without saving the settings.

• “Append / Edit” Screen
Key/Item Function
Available Items Select the items to be added.
For correction, the items selected in the item list of “Study List (Column Title)” will be
displayed.
Display Name Input the name to be displayed in the list.
Title
Font Size Input the font size (point) that will be used for the title displayed in the list.
Bold Check to change title letters to bold.
Double String Check to change title letters to shadowed letters.
Position Select the position of the title in the cell.
“Upper-left”, “Upper-center”, “Upper-right”, “Left-center”, “Middle”, “Right-center”,
“Lower-left”, “Lower-center”, “Lower-right”.
List
Font Size Input the font size used for the data displayed in the list
Bold Check to change data letters to bold.
Double String Check to change data letters to shadowed letters.
Position Select the position of the data in the cell of the list.
“Upper-left”, “Upper-center”, “Upper-right”, “Left-center”, “Middle”, “Right-center”,
“Lower-left”, “Lower-center”, “Lower-right”.
Line wrap For the character strings which is longer than the cell width, check this to break a line to
start a new line.
Items for List Display
Raw Display Type Selection Item List

Patient ID Patient Name Sex Birth Date Age Patient Comments
Ward Study Date Accession Number Study ID Registered Date Hospital
Department
Exam. Room Exam. Tag Guard Perform Exam. Status Alert
PDA (CS-1/3) Requested Proce- NG Reason ― ― ―
dure D

15 - 11
15.3.4 Image Confirmation screen Editing Tool screen

This screen is used to set the display specifications of the image confirmation screen in accordance with user
requests.
IMPORTANT When settings in this screen are changed, even though

the CS-2 application is restarted using [CS2] in the
REGIUS Service screen, the changes are not reflected.
To reflect the changes, click [Restart Windows] from the
EGIUS Service screen or reboot the PC from the
Windows XP desktop.
Display Procedure [Console] → [Layout] → [Image Confirmation]
Key/Item Function
Patient Info display area NameAge
Format Select one of the following four options for the format of patient information displayed in
the patient information area.
"Name (Sex) Age"
"Name (Sex) Birth Date,Age"
"ID Name (Sex) Age"
"ID Name (Sex) Birth Date, Age"
Detailed Item
ID If a format including ID is selected for "Format", select one of the following three ID
types:
"Patient ID", "Study ID", "Accession Number"
Name Specify the display format.
¢Roman£, ¢Kana£, ¢Kanji£
Sex When Sex is not entered in the patient information, select the following two types of
display in the patient information display area:
"Display ' '", "Display ' - '"
Image Display / Image
Confirmation area
Display Gradation Linkage Select the image displayed in the Image Diaplay/Image Confirmation area from either
printer output or host output.
"Printer" / "HOST1" / "HOST2"
Stamp Display Specify whether to display the stamp format/position.
Focus Control Select at which timing the focus is moved.
"Do not auto control", "Read Start Time", "Read End Time", "Auto Confirm Time"

Key/Item Function
Read Registration
Post-registration/Auto- The first registered X-rayed part is automatically registered for read in the first place and
registration when that image is read, the next registered X-ray part is automatically registered for
read. This function eliminates the step to select the order button when reading X-rayed
body parts in the order of registration. This setting is valid only when the cassette
registration method is set to "Post-registration".
Pre-registration auto-focus Set whether to move the focus to the next order when a barcode is registered. This
setting is valid only when the cassette registration method is set to "Pre-registration".
S value adjustment Select the change amount used when the density adjustment button is touched once.
amount The density of the signal value around density 1.2 increases/decreases by the value set
here (equivalent to Dmax3.0).
<Default recommended value>
Facility where viewer is used for diagnosis ・・・・ 0.05
Facility where film is used for diagnosis ・・・・・ 0.02
G value adjustment Select the change amount used when the contrast adjustment button is touched once.
amount Contrast increases/decreases by the value set here.
<Default recommended value>
Facility where viewer is used for diagnosis ・・・・ 0.05
Facility where film is used for diagnosis ・・・・・ 0.02

15 - 13
15.4 [Console] > [System Info.]

15.4.1 “SYSTEM INFO” Screen
Key/Item Function
[Save & Exit] Click to exit from “System Info.” screen after saving the settings.
[Cancel] Click to exit from “System info.” screen without saving the settings.
15.4.2 “SYSTEM INFO • Institution Info.” Screen

Start up from the system Start up from the REGIUS Service Also to be able to start up from the User
menu Screen Tool
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Institution Info.] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Institution Info Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60)
Institution Name Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60)
Institution Address Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60)
Department Name Input when installed. (characters ; 2 byte x 30 / 1 byte x 60)

15.4.3 “SYSTEM INFO • REGIUS Info.” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Regius Info.] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
System
Manufacturer Normally set at the factory. Use this name as a manufacturer when sending additional
information to the HOST.
Model Name Normally set at the factory.
Production Name Set when installed.
Serial No. Do not change the preset number.
Shipping Date Set when installed.
Application
Software Version Displays the current version No. of the CS-2 application.
Installation Date Displays the installation date of the CS-2 application.
Installation Time Displays the installation time of the CS-2 application.

15 - 15
15.4.4 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Reader)” Screen

Using this screen, register the reader device in the system or set the names used in the system.
Related Setting ;Section 15.17, "[Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”"
Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Reader)] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
REGIUS 170
Model Name Input the name for specifying the several REGIUS 170s collectively, using 1 byte x 10
characters 2 byte x 5 characters.
Reader 1 ~ 2 Check “Registered” for the reader device to be used in the system.
Disp. Name Input the name used in the system with 1 byte x 10 characters 2 byte x 5 characters.

15.4.5 “SYSTEM INFO • System (Host, Printer)” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Host, Printer)] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Host
Host 1~3 Check “Registered” for 1 through 4 corresponding to the number of hosts connected.
• Host 3 is for back up.
Disp. Name Input the host name with 1 byte x 10 characters, 2 byte x 5 characters, for the device
specified as “Registered”.
Printer
Printer 1~2 Check “Registered” for 1 through 2 corresponding to the number of printers connected.
• Printer 2 is for back up.
Disp. Name Input the printer name with 1 byte x 10 characters, 2 byte x 5 characters, for the device
specified as “Registered”.
• Max. 10 x 1 byte characters.

15 - 17
15.4.6 “SYSTEM INFO • System (RIS)” Screen

Start up from the sytem menu Start up from the REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (RIS)] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
RIS (Patient/Study)
RIS1, RIS2 Set the presence of RIS device from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2.
Disp. Name Input the RIS name that is assigned to “Registered”.
• Input the name using 1 byte x 10 characters.
RIS (Result)
RIS1, RIS2 Set the presence of RIS device to which the examination result is sent from the CS-2.
Disp. Name Input the RIS name that is assigned to “Registered”.
• Input the name using 1 byte x 10 characters.

15.4.7 “SYSTEM INFO • (Option)” Screen

Screen
IMPORTANT Check boxes shown on this screen are available only

when the optional license is purchased.
Display Procedure • • • •[Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [System (Option)] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Option
HQ Mammography Not used.
Stitching Select whether to use the stitching function or not.
Image Sharing Select whether to use the image sharing function or not.
Data Analysis Select whether to use the data analysis function or not.

15 - 19
15.4.8 “SYSTEM INFO • Order Info.” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [ [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Order Info.] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Order
Input Mandatory Select the patient information that is essential in order information.
• [None], [Patient ID], [Patient Name]. (default: none)
Additional Mandatory Item Select multiple items that should be included in the reservation information.
(Multi Select) • “Patient ID”, “Name”, “Reserved”, “Reserved”, “Sex”, “Birth Date”.
• Items set in the “Input Mandatory” + “Additional Mandatory Item (Multi Select)” are the
essential patient information that should be included in the reservation information.
Order Auto Creation Check “ON” if you want to use the serial number automatically issued by the CS-2 as
the patient ID. (default: OFF)
• When selecting “ON”, set the format and initial count in the [Patient ID] box in the
following.
Exam Tag (Default) Set the default exam. key or not. (default: nonspecific)
Nonspecific • • • not to specify
Specific • • • Specify the number for the default exam. tag.
• When “Specific” is selected, click “Modify” and select the default Exam Tag key.
Default Reader*1 Displays the name of reader icon on which the default exam. tag is set.
Exam Tag Set*1 Name Displays the name of Exam Tag (Default) key.
[Modify]*2 Select the name of Exam. Tag (Default) key.
• “Exam. Key Set” screen will be shown.
Patient ID
Patient ID Format*3 Specify the format of the patient ID to be automatically created.
Patient ID Start*3 Change the current value of the automatically generated patient ID.
Patient ID Length*4 Enter the number of digits in the patient ID specified by the facility.
When the number of digits of the entered patient ID is smaller than the set number of
digits, add 0 (zero) at the beginning of the patient ID. If the number of digits is larger, it is
not necessary to do anything.
*1: Contents of the display becomes effective when “Specific number” is selected by “Exam Tag (Default)” key.
*2: Becomes effective when “Specific number” is selected by “Exam Tag (Default)” key.
*3: Enables input when “ Order Auto-Creation” is set to “ON”.
*4: Enables input when “ Order Auto-Creation” is set to “OFF” (no check).

15.4.9 “SYSTEM INFO • Study Info.” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Study Info.] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Study INFO.
Study ID Format Edit the format of exam. ID. (default: *****)
IMPORTANT Always start with @ that indicates the machine number.

Study ID Start Value Change the current Study ID count. (default: 1)
Study ID Clearance Sets the condition when the ID card is used. (default: OFF) ;
[OFF] • • • Add ID card information to the patient information input on the keyboard.
[ON] • • • Replace by the ID card information.
Serial Infomation Select the subject to which the series information to be added. (default: REGIUS 150
compliance)
REGIUS 150 Compliance • • • adds the information to the image to send.
DICOM Compliance • • • adds the information to the examination result to send.
Series number formation Select whether to add serial No.(number set to the Regius Info. -> System -> Serial No.)
rule to the series No.
ex) When the Serial No. “123”, Series No. “1” --> “12301”
Modify Warning Select whether to send an alarm when patient info or additional info is changed during
study (while reading the image). When it is not checked (OFF), it sends an alarm if
change is made.
Un-adjustment warning When the screen changes from the Patient Registration screen to the Exposure
Confirmation screen, set whether to issue an alert if the patient name in kana and the
patient name in ASCII are compared and do not match. When “OFF” ([Do not alert]) is
not selected, an alert is displayed.
• Study ID will be automatically changed and issued internally. It will be overwritten when the Study ID is sent
from the RIS.

15 - 21
15.4.10 “SYSTEM INFO • Timeout” Screen

Start up from the system Start up from the REGIUS Service A part of items can be changed Using the user
menu Screen Tool.
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Timeout] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Timer List
Auto Confirm Select the timing from the following to output the image upon the user’s confirmation.
(default: OFF)
[ON] • • • After reading the image, when an specific time elapses, it deems that
the image has been verified (OK), and the image is automatically output.
[OFF] • • • The image will not be output until the user touches “OK” button.
Time Set the auto-confirmation time. (default: 20sec)
Auto Study Complete Select the operation to be initiated upon the completion of an examination, from the
following.
This item cannot be set when the initial screen is the Image confirmation screen.
[OFF] • • • Press “Complete” button to exit the examination.
[ON] • • • Automatically completes the examination, and the screen returns to the initial
screen.
Cannot holdback the examination once the all exam data in the order are
confirmed.
Screen Saver Select the type of screen-saving from the following. (default: OFF)
ON • • • The screen switches to the screen saver after the time that is input in the [Time]
box has elapsed.
OFF • • • Screen saver is disabled.
Time Set the time before the screen saver starts (default: 1800sec)

15.4.11 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <User>” Screen

Start up from the system Start up from the REGIUS Service A part of items can be changed Using the user
menu Screen Tool.
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Password <User>] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Password Setting
New Password Currently available password is shown. (default: 1234)
Input the new password to change.
• Use 4 digits only.
New Password (Conf.) Input the password identical to the one newly input in the “New Password” box so that
the verification is made.
• This box become available only when clicking after the new password has been input
in the “New Password” box.

15 - 23
15.4.12 “SYSTEM INFO • Password <Service>” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Password<Service>] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Password Setting
New Password Currently available password is shown. (default: 5678)
Input the new password to change.
• Use 4 digits only.
New Password (Conf.) Input the password identical to the one newly input in the “New Password” box so that
the verification is made.
• This box become available only when clicking after the new password has been input
in the “New Password” box.

15.4.13 “SYSTEM INFO • Output Priority” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Output Priority] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Priority Type
Output Device Select the output device to which the priority is given, and the output order among them.
Type 1 • • • “No priority output device, output in order”
Type 2 • • • “No priority output device, concentrated output”
Priority for Host
Host 1 Set the output priority on each host that is registered in the system.
Host 2
Priority for Printer
Printer Set the output priority on each printer that is registered in the system.
• See below for the print order of the type for “Priority Type” --> “Output Device”.
Type 1 :
Printer Host
Image 1 1st 2nd
Image 2 3rd 4th
Image 3 5th 6th
Type 2:
Printer Host
Image 1 1st 4th
Image 2 2nd 5th
Image 3 3rd 6th

15 - 25
15.4.14 “SYSTEM INFO • Log Level “ Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [Log Level] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Log Level Set the log level to be stored in the HDD for each device. Do not change unless otherwise
instructed. (default ; 4)
IMPORTANT Improper setting of log level may cause unnecessary occupation of

the memory capacity of the HDD.

15.4.15 “SYSTEM INFO • My Network” Screen

menu Screen
• Set this screen when the backup JM is set for the system.
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [CS-2 Network] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Communication Setting
Broadcast Address Set the address to which the JM switch over information is sent (broadcast) from one
CS-2 to the other.
• Set “255.255.255.255” (fixed)
Port Number Set the port number for broadcast. (default: 31313131 fixed)
• Do not change the default.

15 - 27
15.4.16 “SYSTEM INFO • HIPAA” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [System Info.] --> (Select [HIPAA] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
HIPAA
HIPAA Mode Checking “ON” will add to the CS-2 application a security function conforming to the
HIPAA rule of the US .

15.4.17 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Filliping Mark” display

Start up from the system Start up from the
menu REGIUS Service
Screen
• This screen is used to set whether the filliping mark is embedded in the output image. When the ON check-
box of "Fillping Mark" is selected, the following respective mark is printed on the output.
With no filliping mark With filliping mark
IMPORTANT When the ON checkbox is selected, regardless of the type

of output device, the image data is output with the filliping
mark Console embedded.
Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Filliping Mark] in the left menu.
Key/Item Function
Filliping Mark
Filliping Mark Select whether to embed the filliping mark in output images. To embed, select the “ON”
checkbox.
Filliping Mark Position When the “ON” checkbox is selected, select the position in which the filliping mark is
embedded.
• "Upper-left, "Upper-right", "Lower-left", "Lower-right"
Filliping Mark Size When the “ON” checkbox is selected, select the size of the embedded filliping mark.
• "7 x 7mm", "10 x 10mm"

15 - 29
15.4.18 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Remote Maintenance” display

menu REGIUS Service
Screen
• This screen is used to set whether to obtain the remote maintenance preservation data and image adjustment
logs from outside devices.
Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Remote Maintenance] in the left menu
Function
Key/Item Function
Remote Maintenance
IA Auto-start Select whether the remote maintenance should be enabled or not. Ticking “ON” enables
the remote maintenance accessing from external point.
Ccu Maint Info Get Setup
Ccu1
Disp Name Disp Name of Reader1 is displayed. Unable to set.
Maint Info Tick the box when the remote-maintenance of the Reader1 info shall be
implemented.Select REGIUS 170 or REGIUS 190 that shall be set to the Reader1 from
the drop down menu on the right.
Ccu2
Disp Name Disp Name of Reader2 is displayed. Unable to set.
Maint Info Tick the box when the remote-maintenance of the Reader1 info shall be
implemented.Select REGIUS 170 or REGIUS 190 that shall be set to the Reader2 from
the drop down menu on the right.

15.4.19 “SYSTEM INFO ・ Image Sharing” display

menu REGIUS Service
Screen
• This screen is used to set whether to obtain the Image Sharing preservation data and image adjustment logs
from outside devices.
Display Procedure [Console] → [System Info.] → [Image Sharing] in the left menu Function.
Key/Item Function
Local
Disp. Name Input the name of your console (currently operated). The name input here will be
displayed in the “Image Sharing” screen. Set the name unique to each console so that
the image sharing implemented on the other console should work properly.
Remote
Position Input the IP address of the Console that shares the image.
IP Address Input the Host Name of the Console that shares the image.
HOST Name Input the Name of the Console that shares the image.
Display Name The name input here will be displayed in the “Image Sharing” screen. Set the name
unique to each console so that the image sharing implemented on the other console
should work properly.

15 - 31
15.5 [Console] > [Job Manager]

15.5.1 “JOBM INFO • Job Manager Info.” Screen
Set the properties of JM (Job Manager) which the CS-2 recognizes.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Job Manager]---> (Select [Job Manager Info.] in the left menu)
Key/Item Function
Basic Setting
Registrer Select one the following three types of cassette registration:
"Auto-registration", "Post-registration", "Pre-registration"
Host Name Input the serial No. labeled on the back of the CS-2. (cs2- ****: **** means serial
No.)
(Initial value: CS1-0001)
Communication Setting (Standard)
built-in
IP Address Input the IP address of the JM when the “Job Manager (Build-in) is OFF.
• Default: 192.168.20.180, varies depending on the institute.
• Fixed to “127.0.0.1” when it is ON.
Communication Setting (Buckup) Set the information when a back up JM is used.
Registered Device Check when a back up JM is used.
Built-in Select the “ON” checkbox when the IM contained in the CS-2 is used for backup.
IP Address When “Job Manager (Built-in)” is set to “OFF” (no check mark), input the IP
address of back up JM.
IMPORTANT The "Communication Setting /Job Manager Built-in" and

"Communication Setting (Backup) /Job Manager Built-in"
settings are linked. They cannot be selected at the same
time. "Communication Setting /Job Manager Built-in" can
be deselected only when “Pre-registration” is set.

15.5.2 “JOBM INFO • Back to Standard” Screen

• This screen is displayed only when the back up JM is in operation due to failure of standard JM.
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Job Manager] --> (Select “Back to Standard” in the left column)
Key/Item Function
Change to Standard
Permit to Change JM Clicking the check box enables the button on “JM-1 Status Check” screen to select the
standard JM
IMPORTANT The setting on this screen is available only once while the
back up JM is operating. Once the JM is changed to the
standard, this screen will not be shown.

15 - 33
15.6 [Console] > [Printer]

15.6.1 Common Display of “PRINTER INFO” Screen
Key/Item Function
Printer Selection (upper Select the printer name to be set.
left menu)
Printer Type At the start of setup, always select the printer type that corresponds to the selected printer
name. Because the printer type is newly selected, the preset values currently displayed have
no meaning any more.
IMPORTANT When this function is to be used, select the printer type first, before
starting the setting. Selecting the printer during the setting procedure will
overwrite the revised setting on the preset condition.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from “PRINTER INFO” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from “PRINTER INFO” screen without updating the setting.
15.6.2 “PRINTER INFO • Command” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Command] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Service Class
Presentation LUT Select “ON” to send the LUT for matching density between the monitor properties and
printer output. (default: OFF)
Acquire Status Select the choice of status acquisition, and the type of status from the following. (default:
OFF)
“OFF”, “N-GET”, “N-EVENT-REPORT”, “N-GET+N-EVENT-REPORT”
Image

Key/Item Function
Photometric Select the measuring method of light intensity from the following.
monochrome 1 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for black, “4095” for white.
monochrome 2 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for white, “4095” for black.
Image Processing Set one of the following two image processing methods:
"Output D-value", "Output P-value"
Printer
Icon Select the device. This setting will be used for ;
• Decision of the icon displayed on the “System Status” screen.
• Decision of the printer’s Dmax, Dmin.
15.6.3 “PRINTER INFO • Basic TCP/IP” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Basic TCP/IP] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the printer used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters.
IP Address Input the printer’s IP address.
Port Number Input the port No.
Timeout 1 Input the duration for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it
received the data correctly. (default: 60000)
Interval 1 Input the interval (ms) of the output queues that will be sent to the printer. (default: 1000)
Interval 2 Input the interval (ms) with which the confirmation signal for communication is sent to
the printer. (default: 10000)

15 - 35
15.6.4 "PRINTER INFO • Basic DICOM” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Basic DICOM] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
Transfer Syntax Select the transfer syntax from the following. Normally select the default “Implicit VR
Little Endian”.
“Implicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag does not contain
VR.
“Explicit VR Little Endian”: Data is coded by little endian, and sent. Tag contains VR.
“Explicit VR Big Endian”: Data is coded by big endian, and sent. Tag contains VR.
“Reversible JPEG”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG.
• Normally use the default.
Printer AE-Title Input the AE title of the printers using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
CS-2 AE-Title Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
PDU Size Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536). Normally input the default “65536”.
Version Name Displays the implemented version name “KC_CS2_1.00”.
• Change disabled.
UID Displays UID.
Character Set Select the character set to be used in communication from the following. (ASCII only)
“ASCII”
Private Data Select “Send” or “Not send” for the private data transmission. (default:Sent).

15.6.5 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen

This setting will be required when “N-EVENT • • •” is selected in “Status Acquisition” of Section 15.6.2, "“PRINTER
INFO • Command” Screen".

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the printer used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters.
IP Address Input the printer’s IP address.
Setting Value Import
[Import] Copies the Basic TCP/IP setting, and overwrites the setting.

15 - 37
15.6.6 “PRINTER INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen

This setting will be required when “N-EVENT • • •” is selected in “Status Acquisition” of Section 15.6.2, "“PRINTER
INFO • Command” Screen".

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM Setting] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
Transfer Syntax Select the transfer syntax from the following. Normally select the default “Implicit VR
Little Endian”.
VR.
“JPEG Lossless”: Image data is compressed by reversible JPEG.
Printer AE-Title Input the AE title of the printers using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
Version Name Displays the implemented version name “KC_RS_1.00”.
UID Displays UID.
• “ASCII”
Private Data Select “Send” or “Not send” for the private data transmission. (default:Sent).
[Import] Copies the Basic TCP/IP setting, and overwrites the setting.

15.6.7 “PRINTER INFO • Printer Condition” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Printer Condition] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Printer Condition
Trim Select “Available” to trim the image on the printer. (default: Unavailable)
Border Select the boarder color from the following.
• “Black”, “White”
LUT Select the printer’s internal LUT from “LUT1” ~ “LUT7”.
Contrast Select from “+7” ~ “-7”. (default: ±0)
Density Select from “+7” ~ “-7”. (default: ±0)
Stamp Select ON/OFF. (default: all OFF)
When selecting “ON” for general, then select “ON/OFF” for 4 items, i.e. “Date”,
“Message”, “Copies”, “Modality ID”.
Smoothing Type Select from the following. (default: Smoothing Level 3)
• When “Interpolation” is selected, interpolation will be implemented on the CS-2.
• “Type 1” ~ “Type 5” is the smoothing levels implemented on the printer side.
Magnification Type Input the name of magnification type using 1 byte x 16 characters.
Polarity Select from the following. (default: NORMAL)
• “REVERSE”, “NORMAL”
Priority Select from the following. (default: Middle)
• “HIGH”, “MED”, “LOW”
Film Type
Regular Select the normal film type that is loaded in the printer from the following. (default: DR
Blue)
• “Blue”, “Clear”, “DR Blue”, “DR Clear”
Mammo Select the mammo film type that is loaded in the printer from the following. (default: DR
Blue)
• “Blue”, “Clear”, “DR Blue”, “DR Clear”
Film Destination Select the output destination from the following.
• “Processor”, “Magazine”, “BIN1” ~ “BIN9”.

15 - 39
15.6.8 “PRINTER INFO • Output Size” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Output Size] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Available Size Check the film sizes which the printer can output.
Size Conversion Select the film size that replace the size that is not available but requested by print queue.
Supply Film Set the film type loaded in the tray.

15.6.9 “PRINTER INFO• Image” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Image] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Image
Image Reduction Mode Select the type of compression when sending the image data from the following.
(default: spline)
"Spline", "Decimate/Crop", Bilinear0, SINC".
Std. Illumination Luminance of hypothetical illumination that is used in “P” value conversion.
IMPORTANT Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here.
Std. RFL. AMB. Light Luminance of hypothetical ambient light that is used in “P” value conversion.
IMPORTANT Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here.
Grid Suppress Process Select whether to suppress the grid mesh or not. (default: OFF)
“OFF”, ON”
Annotation Tick to embed the annotation in the output image.

15 - 41
15.6.10 “PRINTER INFO • Output Setting” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Sampling Pitch] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Queue
Skip Error Queue Select “ON” to skip the output when there occurs an error in the output queue. (default:
OFF)
“ON”: Skips the queue on which an error occurred, and outputs the next queue.
“OFF”: Suspends the output of queues till the error is reset.
• Setting “Skip Error Queue” to “ON” will output the next queue even in the case of “Film Empty”. This may result in
irregular print order. Therefore, set this item to “OFF” in normal use.

15.6.11 “PRINTER INFO • Printer“ Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Printer] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Boundary Input the border pixels. (default: 2)
Primary Scan Pixels Input the main scan pixels. (default: 10838)
Overflow print memory Item unique to DRYPRO 793, and automatically selected (ticked) when the DRYPRO 793 is
selected in the Printer Type.
Multiformat Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: Printer)
Printer …… Implemented on the printer side.
Regius …… Implemented on the CS-2 side.
Rotation Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: Printer)
Mixed Format Select whether this process should be performed on the CS-2 or printers. (default: CS-2)
Std Film Ori 8x10 - Std Film Select the standard film orientation (Ver/Hor) per film size.(default : landscape for 11x14,
Ori 24x30cm portrait for other sizes)
Frame L/R Pixels Input the image frame pixels. (default: 0)
Set the items per read resolution.Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-
down menu on the right.
Frame Bottom Pixels Input the text width pixels. (default: 0)
Set the items per read resolution.
Set the items by selecting the read resolution from the drop-down menu on the right.
Frame Top Pixels Input the viewer width pixels. (default: 0)
Trim Frame Pixels Input the trim frame pixels. (default: 0)
Border Pixels Input the boarder pixels. (default: 32)

15 - 43
15.6.12 “PRINTER INFO • Output Pixel” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [Output Pixel (175)µm] in the left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Output Pixel
Reading Pixel Size Select the resolution of images.
"175" , "87.5", “43.75”
Output Pixel Size Select the printer output pixel size. (Initial value: 78.6)
"Same as input", "40µm", "78.6µm" "43.75µm", "79.375µm" or manually enter a numeric
value
Width Set the output pixels for each film size in numbers for width at normal mode.
Height Set the output pixels for each film size in numbers for height at normal mode.

15.7 [Console] > [Host]

15.7.1 Common Settings of “HOST INFO” Screen
Key/Item Function
Host Selection (upper left Select the host name to be set.
menu)
Host Type At the start of setup, always select the host type that corresponds to the selected host name.
Select [RS] if no host type corresponding to the host name is available. Because the host type
is newly selected, the preset values currently displayed have no meaning any more.
IMPORTANT When this function is to be used, select the host type first, before starting
the setting. Selecting the host type during the setting procedure will
overwrite the revised setting on the host condition.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “HOST INFO” screen by saving the setting.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “HOST INFO” screen without saving the setting.
15.7.2 “HOST INFO • Command” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Gateway
Gateway Select whether to use the gateway program (program other than DICOM)
• OFF: Do not use the gateway program
• ON: Use the gateway program
Service Class

15 - 45
Key/Item Function
Image IOD Select the image data type to be sent to the host according to the destination host.
(default: CR)
• “CR”, “DX”, “DX + MG”
Storage Commitment Sets whether to implement the communication regarding the Storage Commitment
service with the HOST.
• OFF: Do not implement the Storage Commitment service.
• ON: Implement the Storage Commitment service.
GSPS Sets whether to implement the communication regarding the GSPS service with the
HOST.
• OFF: Do not implement the communication.
• ON: Implement the communication.
Image
Photometric Select the measuring method of light intensity from the following.
monochrome 1 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for black, “4095” for white.
monochrome 2 • • • Sends the image with a definition “0” for white, “4095” for black.
Image Processing • Raw Data (KonicaMinolta Host): Outputs Raw data + Image Processing Parameters.
• Image Processed. D-value (Other Host): Outputs the processed image data in density
value. This is to maintain compatibility with older version.
• Image Processed. P-value (Other Host): Outputs the processed image data in value
that is visually linear.
15.7.3 “HOST INFO • C-STORE TCP/IP” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Printer] --> (Select [C-STORE TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the host name used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters.
IP Address Input the host’s IP address.
Port Number Input the port No of the host.
Interval 1 Input the interval (msec) for the output queue that is sent to the host. (default: 1000)

15.7.4 “HOST INFO • C-STORE DICOM” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [C-STORE DICOM] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
Transfer Syntax Select the transfer syntax from the following. (default “Implicit VR Little Endian”)
VR.
HOST AE-Title Input the AE title of the Hosts using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
REGIUS AE-Title Input the AE title of the CS-2 using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
UID Displays UID.
Character Set Select the character set to be used in communication from the following.
• “ASCII”
• “Latin1”
Private Data Selects “Send” or “Not send” for private data transmission.
Dataset Extension OFF: normal
• When the “Service Class” of the RIS is set to “MWM”, setting this to [ON] will output
the additional dataset to the host. Refer to “Additional Dataset” in the next page.
VR Check Checks whether the data complies with DICOM. If it does not comply, prohibit it from
being sent. (default: OFF)

15 - 47
• Additional Dataset
0040.1001: Requested procedure ID (Requested procedure ID)
0040.0009: Reserved procedure step ID (Reserved procedure step ID)
0040.0007: Reserved procedure step description (Reserved procedure step
description )
0040.0008: Reserved execution item code sequence (Reserved execution
item code sequence)
0040.0253: Executed procedure step ID (Exam ID)
0040.0244: Executed procedure step start data (Exam start date)
0040.0245: Executed procedure step start time (Exam start time)
0040.0254: Executed procedure step descriptor (Reserved procedure step
description)
0040.0260: Executed execution item code sequence (Reserved execution item
code sequence)
15.7.5 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION TCP/IP” Scree

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement1” is selected in “SOP Class” of "Storage Commitment", p.15-46.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-ACTION TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the host used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters.
Timeout 2 Not used (default: 0)
Interval1 Input the interval (ms) between the queues which are sent to the host. (default: 1000)
[Import] Copies the “Storage TCP/IP” setting, and overwrites.

15.7.6 “HOST INFO • N-ACTION DICOM” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement1” or “Storage Commitement” is selected in “SOP Class” of"Storage
Commitment", p.15-46.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-ACTION DICOM] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
VR.
Host AE-Title Input the AE title of the host using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
PDU Size Input the maximum receipt length (default: 65536).
• Use the default as it is.
UID Displays UID.
• “ASCII”
• “Latin1”
Private Data Select Yes/No of private data transmission. (default: “Send”)
[Import] Copies “Storage DICOM” setting, and overwrites.

15 - 49
15.7.7 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT TCP/IP” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage Commitement” is selected in "Storage Commitment", p.15-46.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Storage Commitement2-T] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the host used in the network using 1 byte x 32 characters.
Port Number Input the port no.
Timeout 1 Input the duration before the confirmation for safe receipt of image data from CS-2 is
sent. (default: 60000)
[Import] Copies “C-STORE TCP/IP” setting, and overwrites.

15.7.8 “HOST INFO • N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM” Screen

This setting is required when “Storage+Storage Commitement” is selected in"Storage Commitment", p.15-46.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [N-EVENT-REPORT DICOM] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
VR.
HOST AE-Title Input the AE title of the host using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
PDU Size Input the maximum receipt length (default :65536).
• Use the default value as it is.
UID Displays UID.
Character Set Select the character set to be used in communication from the following.
• “ASCII”
• “Latin1”
Private Data Select whether to send or not to send the private data. (default: Send)
[Import] Copies the “C-STORE DICOM” setting, and overwrites.

15 - 51
15.7.9 “HOST INFO • Image” Screen

Set the definition for the edition of the image to be sent according to the destination host.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Image] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Image
Image Reduction Mode Select the type of compression when sending the image data from the following.
(default: SINC method)
• “Spline”, “Decimate / Crop”, “Bilinear”, “SINC method”.
Presentation Size Mode Display method requested to the HOST.
• MAGNIFY: Displays by magnifying. (100%)
• SCALE TO FIT: Displays the image as large as possible to fit to the display area.
• TRUE SIZE: Displays the image at the same size (mm) as read.
Std. Illumination Luminance of hypothetical illumination that is used in “P” value conversion.
Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here.
Std. RFL. AMB. Light Luminance of hypothetical ambient light that is used in “P” value conversion.
Do not change the value, neither input the measured value here.
Grid Suppression Select whether to suppress the grid mesh or not from the following.
• “OFF”, “ON”
Annotation Tick to embed the annotation in the output image.
Printer (Sync.)
E/F/H Processing Reflects the print condition(image processing, overlay, etc.) that is set on “Detail Setting”
Out of Shutter screen to the output to the HOST.
Out of Chest Wall Select “ON” when outputting the same contents as used for printer to the HOST .
(default: ON for “E/F/H Processing, “Masking (Out of Shutter)”, “Masking (Side of
Overlay (Marker1)
Chest)”, OFF for the rest)
Overlay (Marker2)
Overlay (Stamp)
Overlay (Scale/Grid)
Trimming

15.7.10 “HOST INFO • Output Setting” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Host] --> (Select [Output Setting] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Queue
Skip Error Queue Set the reaction when an error occurs in output. (default: OFF)
• ON: Skip the output queue which sent an error, and output the next queue.
• OFF: Suspend the output until the error is corrected.
SOP Instance ID (Multihosts)
Use Same SOP Setting will vary depending on the host. Follow the instruction.
Stored Days
Stored Days Setting will vary depending on the host. Follow the instruction.
Action of Timeout

15 - 53
15.7.11 “HOST INFO ・ Output Pixel” screen

menu REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • •[Console] --> [Host] --> "Output Pixel" in the lower left menu
Key/Item Function
Output Matrix
Reading Pixel Size Select the image resolution.
"175µm" (Standard), "87.5µm" (high-definition), “43.75µm” (option).
Output Pixel Size Select the output pixel size from the following initial values. (Default value: Same as
input)
"Same as input", "87.5µm”, “175µm", "350µm" or enter a numeric value
Width Use a numeric value to enter the output pixel size of the width side in the standard mode
for each film size.
Height Use a numeric value to enter the output pixel size of the height side in the standard
mode for each film size.

15.8 [Console] > [RIS]

15.8.1 Common Settings of “RIS INFO” Screen
Key/Item Function
RIS Selection (upper right Select the RIS name to be set.
menu) Related Settings;
[Save & Exit] Exit from the “RIS INFO” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Exit from the “RIS INFO” screen without saving the setting.
15.8.2 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Gateway
Gateway to Others • OFF: Do not use the gateway program.
• ON: Use the gateway program.
• Dr. View: Use the gateway exclusive for Dr. View/RIS (Asahi Kasei Informations
Systems)
Command
Service Class Select the DICOM Service class to be used.
• Detached • • • Uses the “DICOM Detached”.
• MWM)• • • Uses the “DICOM MWM”.
• When “Gateway to Others” is ON, this setting is for Service Class used with the
gateway program.
• Depending on the selection, the menu in the left column changes as follows.
The above screen image is when ”Detached” is selected. When "MWM” is selected,
"Detached” in the menu is replaced with "MWM”.

15 - 55
15.8.3 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (Patient/Study)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the RIS name from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2 using 1 byte x
32 characters.
IP Address Input the RIS’s IP address from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2.
Port Number Input the RIS’s port No.from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2.
Timeout 1 Input the duration (ms) for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it
Timeout 2 Among the settings of time-out of duration before the RIS replies to the data request
sent from CS-2, this particularly set the time-out(ms) before the CS-2 receives the
patient/examination data from RIS. (default: 30000)
• Only valid when the “Service Class” is set to “MWM”.
Interval 1 Input the search interval (ms) in number. (default: 1000)
• Valid when “MWM” is selected in “Service Class” of “Command”.

15.8.4 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (Patient/Study)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] -->”Patient/Study” --> (Select [DICOM] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
Transfer Syntax Select “Implicit VR Little Endian”.
RIS AE-Title Input the AE title of the RIS using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
UID Displays UID.
Character Set When “Service Class” of “Command” is set at “MWM”, select the character set from the
following;
• “ASCII” (fixed)
• ”Latin1” “Latin 1”
• When “Service Class” of “Command” is set to “Detached”, the received character set
is reflected.

15 - 57
15.8.5 ”RIS INFO • Detached” Screen

This setting is required when “Detached” is selected in "Command", p.15-55.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Patient/Study” -->(Select [Detached] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Screen Control
Auto Start Study Sets whether to automatically start the study when receiving the order on the initial screen (Sin-
gle image screen, multiimage screen).
ON: Automatically start the study.

15.8.6 “RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen

This setting is required when “Modality Worklist” is selected in "Command", p.15-55.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Patient/Study” -->(Select [Modality Worklist] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Search
Trigger Select the timing for the CS-2 to search the patient information. (default: Search)
“Search” • • • Search will start when the user touches [Search] on the CS-2 application.
“Search + Get List” (with auto-update) • • • In addition to the “Search” mode described
above, search starts when “Update List” is touched and automatically starts
searching at a specific interval (polling).
"Search + Get List" (without auto-update) • • • In addition to "Search" mode, search
starts when "Update List" is touched. (Auto search at a specific interval (poll-
ing) is not performed.)
Property (Get List)
Scope of Searching Set the scope of searching for patient information, which is manually implemented on
the CS-2. (default: Not Specified ~ Not Specified)
• This becomes valid only when the date/time for study data is set on the RIS side.
Station AE Title Input the AE title which the RIS server uses to discriminate the CS-2.
Property (search)
Scope of Searching Set the scope of searching for patient information, which is automatically implemented
on the CS-2. (default: Not Specified ~ Not Specified)
• This becomes valid only when the date/time for study data is set on the RIS side.
AE Title Input the AE title which the RIS server uses to discriminate the CS-2.

15 - 59
Key/Item Function
Exam Tag
Convert Table Select the exposure condition code that shall be sent from the RIS. (default: DICOM)
“DICOM (1 to 1)” • • • Code set & value
“JJ1017 (3 to 1)” • • • JJ1017 Code (Method + Orientation + Body Parts)
• When the RIS is using IDS, always select “DICOM”.
Convert Source Code Select the code type with which the CS-2 convert the exposure conditions into the
exam. keys.
“Scheduled Code” • • • Selects the scheduled item code to be executed.
“Req. ID/Description • • • Selects the requested ID/Description code.
“Req. Code • • • Selects USA standard method.
• When the RIS is using IDS, always select “Scheduled Code”.
Ignore 1st Value Checking “ON” will neglect the 1st row of the conversion table when the exposure
condition is converted into exam. tag on the CS-2.
• When the RIS is using IDS, always select “OFF”.
Ignore 2nd Value Checking “ON” will neglect the 2nd row of the conversion table when the exposure
condition is converted into exam. tag on the CS-2.
• When the RIS is using IDS, always select “OFF”.
[Excel File] Reads pr writes in Excel format, the correspondence table (conversion table) to search
the code used in the RIS from the body part or exam. tag used on the CS-2.
• Opens “Body parts - Exam Tag Conversion” screen.
Serial No.
Check Identical • Check “ON” to handle the examination as separate when different exam. reservations
are made under the same exam. instance UID.

15.8.7 “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” Screen

Click [Excel File] on Section 15.8.6, "“RIS INFO • Modality Worklist” Screen" to open “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Con-
version” screen.
Key/Item Function
Exam Tag --> CSV File
File Name Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path.
[Browse...] Opens the dialogue for opening the file, and specifies the save destination and the file
name.
[Export] Implements file export.
CSV File--> Exam Tag Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path.
File Name Shows a file name of the Exam. Tag of Excel format with path.
[Browse...] Opens the dialogue for opening the file, and specifies the save destination and the file
name.
[Import] Implements file import.
[Exit] Exit “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion” screen.
• Automatically exit after implementing [Export] or [Import].

15 - 61
15.8.8 “RIS INFO • Command” Screen (Result)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [Command] in the lower left menu.)
TB1BL-Table1BodyLeft1 Function
Gateway
Gateway to Others Set to OFF.
Command
Service Class Select the DICOM Service class to be used.
• Detached • • • Uses the “DICOM Detached”.
• MWM)• • • Uses the “DICOM MPPS”.
• Depending on the selection, the menu in the left column changes as follows.
The above screen is when "Detached" is selected. When "MWM" is selected,
"Detached" in the menu is replaced with "MWM".

15.8.9 “RIS INFO • TCP/IP” Screen (result)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [TCP/IP] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name Input the RIS name from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2 using 1 byte x
32 characters.
IP Address Input the RIS’s IP address from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2.
Port Number Input the RIS’s port No.from which the patient information is sent to the CS-2.
Timeout 1 Input the duration (ms) for which the CS-2 waits a confirmation from the receiver that it
Interval 1 Input the output interval (msec). (default: 1000)

15 - 63
15.8.10 “RIS INFO • DICOM” Screen (result)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [DICOM] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DICOM
Transfer Syntax Select the Transfer Syntax.
Only “Implicit VR Little Endian” is available at the moment.
RIS AE-Title Input the AE title of the RIS(s) using 1 byte x 16 alphabets.
PDU Size Input the maximum receipt length (0 ~ 65536).
Normally input the default “65536”.
Change disabled.
UID Displays UID.
Change disabled.
Character Set Select the character set from the following;
“ASCII”
“Latin1”

15.8.11 “RIS INFO • Detached” Screen (result)

This setting is required when “Detached” is selected in "Service Class", p.15-62.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [Detached] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Detached
Patient DB Registration Select whether to register the patient info that is changed on the CS on the DB of RIS.
• ON: Patiient info changed on the CS will also be registered on the patien DB of RIS.
• OFF: Only the patient info that is newly input on the CS will be registered on the patient
DB of RIS.
Notify [Completed Study] Check “ON” to notify the RIS of completion of the study. (default: OFF)

15 - 65
15.8.12 “RIS INFO • MPPS” Screen (result)

This setting is required when “MPPS” is selected in "Service Class", p.15-62.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [RIS] --> “Result” -->(Select [MPPS] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
MPPS
Send <Completed> Select the timing with which the exam. result will be sent to the RIS. (default: After
Output com-pleted)
None Sending • • • Sends only the exposure start signal.
After Image Confirmed • • • Sends when [OK] button is clicked on the “Exposed Image
Confirma-tion”
screen.
After Output completed • • • sends when the output to the host or printer is completed.
• Enabled when “MPPS” is selected in “Service Class”.
Send Exposure Dose Check “ON” to include the X-ray dose in the exam. result. (default: OFF)
Send <Discont.> as Set whether to notify Discont. to RIS using a method that does not conform to DICCOM.
Cancel (Initial value: OFF)
Send Performed Code CheNot availableck “ON” when the interruption information of PPS is sent. This selection is
enabled by select-ing. (Default: ON)
Continue on Other CS-2 Not available
Send Film Consumption Check “ON” to send the film consumption (sheets)
to the RIS. (default: ON)
Note: Valid when the service class is “MPPS”.
Send Study Deletion Check “ON” to delete the examination from reser-vation
list on the RIS when it is deleted on the
“Exam List” screen . (default: ON)
Note: Valid when the service class is “MPPS”.
Issue SOP Instance UID Check “ON” so that the CS-2 issues the UID which associates the Study Comepltes to
Study Start of the MPPS.

15.9 [Console] > [Density]

15.9.1 Common Settings of “MARKER INFO” Screen
IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before starting this setting.
Key/Item Function
Output Destination Selection Select the output destination name on which the marker is set.
(upper right menu)
[Import] Click on this button to copy the existing marker setting, and to apply this setting to the
other device.
• Upon clicking, a window to select the copy original and copy destination will be shown.
[Save & Exit] Exit from the “MARKER INFO” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Exit from the “MARKER INFO” screen without saving the setting.
15.9.2 “MARKER INFO • Overlay Set” Screen

Apply the same settings for “R/L marker”, “Ori. Marker”, “Stamp”.
Start up from the system Start up from the REGIUS Service A part of items can be changed Using the
menu Screen user Tool.
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Density] -->(Select [Overlay] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
Overlay Select the overlay type from the following.
Overwrite on the image data . . Writes the overlay information as a part of image.
Embed in the image data . . . . . Embeds the overlay information in the vacant bits of the
image data.

15 - 67
Key/Item Function
Overlay Method Select this setting enables the alteration of the overlay information later.
Background Density Input the density value for the background of the marker.
Character Density Input the density of the marker text.
Dmin Input the lowest density of the image.
Dmax Input the highest density of the image.
15.9.3 “MARKER INFO • Stamp Position” Screen

Set screen for setting the display position of R/L, Ori. markers.
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Density] -->(Select [Stamp Position] in the lower left menu.)
Key/Item Function
DCM Appears when the host is selected in the “Output Target” menu.
Tick this box to enable the Stamp setting to be interlocked with the printer.
• “Overlay 1”setting interlocked with the printer in the “HOST INFO • Image” screen will
also be changed.
Stamp
OFF/ON Select (check) the position on the film where the stamp will be printed.
X Offset Input the shifting amount (mm) to horizontally shift the stamp position from the current
setting.
• Affix (-) to shift to the left.
Y Offset Input the shifting amount (mm) to vertically shift the stamp position from the current
setting.
• Affix (-) to shift to the upper.

15.10 [Console] > [Stamp]

15.10.1 “Stamp Infomation” Screen
IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the setting.
(Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save” Screen")
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp]
Key/Item Function
Settings Cannot be set.
Output Devices Cannot be set.
Check Box (enable) Select (check) the stamp No. that will be selectable on the “Stamp Select” screen of the
CS-2 application.
Stamp No. Select the stamp No. to be set.
• Select the stamp No. to show its sample on the lower part of the screen.
Edit Screen
Screen Select Select the screen on which the stamp is set.
“Format” ••• Selects the screen on which the overall stamp size (lines), etc. is set.
“Detail” ••• Selects the screen on which stamp items in detail is set.
[Edit] Displays the screen selected by “Screen Select”, and enables to edit on the screen.
“Format” ••• Displays the screen on which the overall stamp size (lines), etc. is set.
“Detail” ••• Displays the screen on which stamp items in detail is set.
Stamp Copy
[Copy] Use this button to copy the existing stamp setting, and apply to the other device.
• Click to open the copied screen of the setting.
Sample Display
[Preview] Click this button to see the text size, etc., with which you can simulate the actual output.
• Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the
bit map of the selected stamp sample.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Information” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Information” screen without saving the setting.
IMPORTANT Do not deselect "(Valid)" for the "Valid/Invalid” field.

15 - 69
15.10.2 “Stamp Format” Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp] --> Select [Format] in the screen select menu --> [Edit]
Key/Item Function
Stamp Size
Total Lines Input the total number of lines for stamp. (1 ~ 6 lines)
Width Input the length (mm) of the display area for the stamp.
Font Size per Line
1 ~ 6 line Input the text height (mm) for each line.
Others
Alignment Select the line alignment for the stamp block from the following.
“default (left-aligned)” ••• Align the line to the left.
“Center (center-aligned)” ••• Align the line to the center.
[Refresh] Clicking on this button will update the sample display shown on the lower margin of the
screen.
Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the bit
map of the selected stamp sample.
[Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Gen. Setting” screen after temporary saving the setting.
The setting will not be saved until [Save & Exit] is clicked under [Console] > [Stamp],
p.15-69.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “Stamp Format” screen without saving the setting.
• “Total Lines”, “Width” and “Font Size per Line” can be set independently. Therefore, it may happen that the
character line does not fit to the stamp area depending on the setting. For those items such as “Patient
Name”, “Patient ID”, etc. that are not fixed in character count, check that all characters presuming the longest
can fit to the stamp area.

15.10.3 “Set Stamp” Screen

Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Stamp] --> Select [Detail] in the screen select menu --> [Edit].
Key/Item Function
Check Box (enable) Select (check) from 60 items to be included in the stamp.
For No.41 onward, you can set any character strings.
Item Select the item(DICOM defined or KonicaMinolta defined items) that shall be displayed
in the stamp(refer to the “Item Name List”)
Stamp Layout
Row Specify the starting line of display (vertical) by line (line counts from the top). (“Comment
Ttl Lines” of Section 15.10.2, "“Stamp Format” Screen", p.15-70.)
Column Specified the starting raw of display (horizontal) by raw (1 byte character counts from the
left end).
When several items are set for one line, the item with lesser numbers input will be
displayed on the left.
Length Specify the display width of item by number of 1 byte characters.
Options Select the display forms.
The display type will be different depending on the setting of “Item Name”. (refer to the
“Item Name List”)
Sample String No.1~40: Input the sample characters in each item that shall be exhibited on sample
display(Reload) and bit map(Preview) display.
No.41~60: Input the characters free from the item, which will displayed on the stamp.
[Refresh] Clicking on this button will update the sample display shown on the lower margin of the
screen.
Clicking on this button will initiate the paint software of Windows 2000, and shows the
bit map of the selected stamp sample.
[OK] Click this button to exit from the “Set Stamp” screen after temporary saving the setting.
The setting will not be saved until the “OK” is clicked under [Console] > [Stamp], p.15-
69.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “Set Stamp” screen without saving the setting.

15 - 71
• Item Name List

ITEM DICOM TAG NR; DIS- ITEM DICOM TAG NR; DIS-
DICOM VM PLAY DICOM VM PLAY
STYLE STYLE
Study Date 0008,0020:1 B X-ray Tube Current 0018,1151:1 A
Image Date 0008,0023:1 B Exposure 0018,1152:1 A
Study Time 0008,0030:1 C Rectification Type 0018,1156:1 A
Image Time 0008,0033:1 C Image Area Dose Prod 0018,115E:1 A
Accession Number 0008,0050:1 A Filter Type 0018,1160:1 A
Institution Name 0008,0080:1 A Pixel Spacing-Row 0018,1164:1 A
Institution Address 0008,0081:1 A Pixel Spacing-Col 0018,1164:2 A
Referring Physician 0008,0090:1 D Grid 0018,1166:1 A
Station Name 0008,1010:1 A Focal Spot 0018,1190:1 A
Department Name 0008,1040:1 A Anode Material 0018,1191:1 A
Recording Physician 0008,1048:1 D Breast Thickness 0018,11A0:1 A
Performing Physician 0008,1050:1 D Pressure 0018,11A2:1 A
Reading Study Phys. 0008,1060:1 D Phosphor Type 0018,1261:1 A
Operator's Name 0008,1070:1 D Cassette Orientation 0018,1402:1 A
DiagnosesDescription 0008,1080:1 A Read Size 0018,1403:1 A
Model Name 0008,1090:1 A Detector Primary Angle 0018,1510:1 A
Patient's Name 0010,0010:1 D View Position 0018,5101:1 A
Patient ID 0010,0020:1 A Sensitivity 0018,6000:1 A
Patient's Birth Date 0010,0030:1 B Detector ID 0018,700A:1 A
Patient's Birth Time 0010,0032:1 C Grid Absorb.Material 0018,7040:1 A
Patient's Sex 0010,0040:1 A Grid SpacingMaterial 0018,7041:1 A
Other Patient ID 0010,1000:1 A Grid Thickness 0018,7042:1 A
Other Patient Names 0010,1001:1 D Grid Pitch 0018,7044:1 A
Patient's Age 0010,1010:1 E Grid AspectRatio-V 0018,7046:1 A
Patient's Height 0010,1020:1 A Grid AspectRatio-H 0018,7046:2 A
Patient's Weight 0010,1030:1 A Grid Focal Distance 0018,704C:1 A
Medical Alerts 0010,2000:1 A Filter Material 0018,7050:1 A
Contrast Allergies 0010,2110:1 A Filter Thickness Min 0018,7052:1 A
Ethnic Group 0010,2160:1 A Filter Thickness Max 0018,7054:1 A
Occupation 0010,2180:1 A Exposure Ctrl Mode 0018,7060:1 A
Add. Patient History 0010,21B0:1 A Exposure Status 0018,7064:1 A
Pregnancy Status 0010,21C0:1 A Study Instance UID 0020,000D:1 A
Patient Comments 0010,4000:1 A Series Instance UID 0020,000E:1 _
Contrast/Bolus Agent 0018,0010:1 A Study ID 0020,0010:1 A
Body Part Examined 0018,0015:1 A Series Number 0020,0011:1 A
KVP 0018,0060:1 A Instance ID 0020,0013:1 A
Serial Number 0018,1000:1 A Pat. Orientation-1st 0020,0020:1 A
Software Versions 0018,1020:1 A Pat. Orientation-2nd 0020,0020:2 A
C/B Route 0018,1040:1 A Laterality 0020,0060:1 A
C/B Volume(cm3) 0018,1041:1 A Image Laterality 0020,0062:1 A
C/B Start Time 0018,1042:1 C Other Study ID 0020,1070:1 A
C/B Stop Time 0018,1043:1 C Image Comment 0020,4000:1 A
C/B Total Dose 0018,1044:1 Num. of Image 0021,1052:1 _
Field of View-Col 0018,1149:2 Contrast Flow Rate 0018,1046:1 A
Mag. Factor (x100) 0018,1114:1 A Contrast Flow Dur. 0018,1047:1 A
Field of View Shape 0018,1147:1 A C/B Ingredient 0018,1048:1 A
Field of View-Row 0018,1149:1 A C/B Concentration 0018,1049:1 A
Source-Patient [mm] 0018,1111:1 A QC Image 0028,0300:1 A

ITEM DICOM TAG NR; DIS- ITEM DICOM TAG NR; DIS-
DICOM VM PLAY DICOM VM PLAY
STYLE STYLE
Reason for Study 0032,1030:1 A Study Priority 0032,000C:1 A
Requesting Physician 0032,1032:1 D Sched.StudyStartDate 0032,1000:1 B
Requesting Service 0032,1033:1 A Sched.StudyStartTime 0032,1001:1 C
Study Comments 0032,4000:1 A Refer. Pending A
Special Needs 0038,0050:1 A Study Pending A
Cur. Patient Location 0038,0300:1 A Host Pending A
Pat. Residence(Ward) 0038,0400:1 A Output Device A
Patient State 0038,0500:1 A Img Confirm mode A
Total Exposure Dur. 0040,0300:1 A Source-Detector [mm] 0018,1110:1 A
Total Exposure Num. 0040,0301:1 _ Input Distinguish A
Exposure Time 0018,1150:1 Img Confirm screen
Entrance Dose 0040,0302:1 A Internal Img No. A
Exposed Area 0040,0303:1 A Mag.mode(integer) _
Source-Entrance [mm] 0040,0306:1 A Mag.mode(float) _
Radiation Comments 0040,0310:1 _ ExamTag Group A
Transport Arrange. 0040,1004:1 _ ExamTag Name A
Recipients of Result 0040,1010:1 D LUT Name _
Placer Order Number 0040,2016:1 _ DL(G-Process) _
Filler Order Number 0040,2017:1 _ DH(G-Process) A
Inc. Plane Dose(mGy) 0040,8302:1 A S-Value A
Pat.Confidentiality 0040,3001:1 A G-Value A
Medium Type 2000,0030:1 _ Shift A
Film Size ID 2010,0050:1 _ Rotate A
Number of Films 2100,0170:1 _ E ON/OFF A
Set Exam Tag Num A F ON/OFF A
Set Page Name A E bl A
Set Group Name A E bh A
Set Tag Name A E MaskSize A
User Exam Tag Num A F b1 A
User Page Name A F b2 A
User Group Name A F MaskSize A
User Tag Name A H ID (HE or HF) A
XrayCtrlCode A HF-STANDARD A
Tube Num A HE-STANDARD A
AEC Position _ HF-b2 A
Guard A HF-b1 A
Rows 0028,0010:1 A HE-bh A
Columns 0028,0011:1 A HE-bl A
• Blank cells in the “DICOM TAG NR: DICOM VM” column indicate the items are unique to KonicaMinolta.
• For display styles that can be selected in “DISPLAY STYLE”, refer to the following tables. (“−“ indicates that the selec-
tion of display style is not available)

15 - 73
• <Display Styles> List

A Undefined B "Date(JP-YYYY)" "Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)"
Convert to Hex "Date(JP-YY)" "Time(JP-HH+MM)"
C
2-byte Character "Date(JP-JP)" "Time(HH-MM-SS)"
Devided by 100 "Date(US-YYYY)" "Time(HH-MM)"
Decimal down 2 "Date(US-YY)"
OFF/ON "Date(US-JP)" "Name/JP1(2byte)"
Yes/No "Date(UK-YYYYY)" "Name/JP2(Kana1)"
D
Marker Position "Date(UK-YY)" "Name/JP3(Kana2)"
(Sex Entry) "Date(UK-JP)" "Name"
Sex Entry
E "Age"
"Age"

15.11 [Console] > [Exam Tag]

15.11.1 "Exam Tag Setup” Screen
IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the
settings (Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save”
Screen").

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam Tag]
Key/Item Function
Body Part Selecting the body parts from the combo box will restrict the display of the exam. tags.
Exam Tag List The status of the exam. tags registered on the CS-2 will be described in different colors.
Text Colors :
White • • • Indicates this is an original Exam Tag key of the REGIUS Master.
Orange • • • Indicates this is a key copied from an original Exam Tag.
• The key selected on the list will be displayed in blue regardless of the key origin as
shown above. Double-clicking the selected key will open the “Detail Setting” window
of that key.
Background Colors :
Dark Green • • • Indicates the Exam Tag key has been registered as a set key (a key to
be displayed on the “Body Part/Order Select” screen).
Black • • •Indicates the key is not registered as a set key (not assigned).
Selection Scope Select from the following, the exam. tags to which the altered setting is applied.
Selection Applies the changes to the currently selected keys.
All Applies changes to all keys.
Exam Tag Name Applies changes to the key whose key name is input.
[Search] Starts search.
[IDS] Exports the Exam Tag as a compressed file.
• Displays the IDS export dialogue.
[Property] • Clicking on this button after selecting the exam. tag will display the “Detailed Setting”
screen (1/3).
[Save & Exit] Exit the “Exam Tag Setup” screen after saving the changes of Exam. Tags.
[Cancel] Exit the “Exam Tag Setup” screen without saving the changes of Exam. Tags.

15 - 75
Serial No. of keys (raw) An identical serial number (18 digits) is assigned to each exam. tag.
Digits from the right end Descriptions
1 ~ 2 digits Copy history. Increments by “1” each time it is copied.
3 ~ 4th digits Spare
5 ~ 6th digits Orientation
7 ~ 8th digits Technical method
9th digit Right and left
10 ~ 12th digits Body parts 2 (corresponds to a group)
13~ 15th digits Body parts 1 (corresponds to a general classification)
16~ 17th digits Machine code;
00: Old machines (REGIUS 150)
01: New machines (REGIUS 170)
18th digit Modality
1: Cassette, 2: Erect 3: Recumbent

15.11.2 “Detail Setup” Screen (1/4)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property]
Key/Item Function
ExamTag Information Input the names for user exposure condition, group, page.
Read Information Set various information regarding the reading from the reader device.
Output Information • Set various conditions for output.
• Clicking on the “Dev. Set Up” will display the “Device Set” screen. (refer to “Output
Device Information” Screen, p.15-78 )
Study Information To specify the body parts, select the body part to be examined in the dialogue which will be
displayed by clicking the “Part Select”.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new setup reflected to the
exam. tag key.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen without updating the setup.
[Previous Page] Proceed to “Detail Setup 4/4” screen.
[Next Page] Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/4” screen.

15 - 77
15.11.3 “Output Device Information” Screen

menu Screen
IMPORTANT Output format of the CS-2 is not maintained in the Exam

Tag keys but follows format set in the “Image Confirm”
screen. This means the settings made for the output size,
output orientation, output mode as well as the
magnification type are all neglected.
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Dev. Setup]
Key/Item Function
Output Device Selection Box Select the output device to be set.
Operational Setting Select in the combo box, and set various conditions for the output device regarding output
counts, output size, trimming, image processing, etc.
exam. tag key.
NOTE Do not change the setting of stamp, marker 1 or marker 2.

15.11.4 “Study Parts Select” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Body Part]
Key/Item Function
Body Part List Select the body part to be examined in the table.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Study Parts Select”screen with the newly selected body
part reflected to the exam. tag key.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from the “Study Parts Select” screen without updating the setup.

15 - 79

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page]
Key/Item Function
ExamTag Set various detailed information for image reading and X-ray generator device.
X-Ray Filter Set various information for X-ray filter.
X-Ray Grid Set various information for X-ray grid
X-ray Result
Auto Search Key Use this key to allocate the exposure result to the exam tag key in conjunction with the X-
ray exposure device for mammography.
Input the key to search the orientation information obtained from the X-ray exposure
device for mammography.
exam. tag key.


menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page]
Key/Item Function
Processing Name Select the process parameters in the dialogue that will be displayed by clicking on the
“Process Select”.
Image Setting for patient orientation, etc.
Contrast/ Bolus SettingCannot be useds for contrast medium and bolus.
2-Dimensional Calibration Cannot be used
exam. tag key.
IMPORTANT Do not use “Select”. For an exam.tag key with which auto
recognition of the subject is not performed, “Select” is
grayed out.
15.11.7 “Process Select” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Exam. Tag] --> “select the Exam. Tag” --> [Property] --> [Next Page] --> [Select]
IMPORTANT Do not use the Select screen. Press [Cancel] to exit the
screen.

15 - 81
15.11.8 Detail Setup screen (4/4)

menu REGIUS Service
ScrExam. Tageen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [Exam. Tag] → Select Exam. Tag → [Property] → [Next Page] → [Next
Page] → [Next Page]
Key/Item Function
Recognition of Body Part Do not change the setting.
Setting of Recognition of Body
Part
Category Displays operation type of auto recognition of body part (cannot be set).
Processing Displays a list of image processing parameters that can be candidates for auto recognition
of body part assigned to the applicable Exam. Tag.
For Exam. tags other than the original, image processing parameters can be deleted.
However, at least one image processing parameter must remain.
[Delete] Used to delete image processing parameters that are recognition candidates for the
subject auto recognition processing. This setting, however, is only effective for Exam. Tags
other than the originals.
[Save&Exitt] Reflect the changed content to Exam. Tag and close the Detail Setup screen. Changed
content is reflected in Exam. Tag and the Detail Setup screen is closed.
[Cancel] Close the Detail Setup screen without updating the settings.
[PrvePage] Display the Detail Setup screen (3/4).
[Next Page] Display the Detail Setup screen (1/4).
IMPORTANT Targets are only Exam. Tags created by copying and also
Exam. Tag that perform subject auto recognition.

15.12 [Console] > [Process]

15.12.1 “Process Parameter Setup” Screen
IMPORTANT “Process Parameter Setup” screen of “Service Tool” is a
screen on which process parameters can be changed en
masse.
IMPORTANT Make sure to back up the data before changing the

settings. (Section 15.27.1, "“System Setup File Save”
Screen")

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process]
Key/Item Function
Process Parameter List Text Colors
White • • • Indicates this is an original Exam Tag key of the REGIUS Master.
Orange • • • Indicates this is a key copied from an original Exam Tag.
• The key selected on the list will be displayed in blue regardless of the key origin as
shown above. Double-clicking the selected key will open the “Detail Setting” window
of that key.
Background Colors
Dark Green • • • Indicates the Exam Tag key has been registered as a set key (a key to
be displayed on the “Body Part/Order Select” screen).
Black • • •Indicates the key is not registered as a set key (not assigned).
Selection Scope Select from the following, the exam. tags to which the altered setting is applied.
Selection Changes applied to the currently selected keys.
All Changes applied to all keys.
Process Input the process name (text) to be searched
[Search] Starts searching.
[Property] Clicking on this button after selecting the exam. tag will display the “Detail Setting”
screen (1/5).
[Overwrite] Overwrite the selected process parameter with Regius Master.
• Restores the process parameters that have been manipulated by the user to the
original REGIUS master.

15 - 83
Key/Item Function
[Save & Exit] Exit from the “Processing Setup” screen after saving the changes of the process
parameters.
[Cancel] Exit from the “Processing Setup” screen without saving the changes of the process
parameters.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property]
Key/Item Function
Process Information Input the process name. ON/OFF setting of the flag for reprocessing is
capable in the detailed setting.
Irradiation Field Confirmation Parame- Various settings for irrad. field recognition parameters.
ter
ROI (A/B) Parameter Various settings for body part recognition parameters. Selectable from A and B.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up
reflected to process parameter.
[Previous Page] Proceed to “Detail Setup 5/5” page.
[Next Page] Proceed to “Detail Setup 2/5” page.


menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page”
Key/Item Function
Gray-scale (A/B) Calc. Various settings for calculation parameters. Selectable from A and B.
SG-Value Limitation Input the higher and lower limits for S-value and G-value in numbers.
Judgement Parameter Input the judge parameter in numbers.
Partition Pattern Identification Select from ON/OFF of the sepa. recog. parameter and input the parameter in numbers
Parameter when “ON” selected.
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from the “Detail Setup” screen with the new set up reflected to
process parameter.

15 - 85

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Process] --> “select the Process Parameter” --> [Property] -->”Next Page” x 2
Key/Item Function
Image Orientation Discrimina- Select from ON/OFF of the image ori. recog. parameter and input the parameter in
tion Parameter numbers when “ON” selected.
Image Parameter Description Select “Use” or “No Use”.
Learning Parameter
Initialize Return image processing parameter values that were set to user’s preference by the auto
learning function to the default values.
Select "ON" or "OFF".
Learning Stop Set this item to ON in order not to use the auto learning function further after image
processing parameters are finalized to the user’s preference by the auto learning function.
ON: Stops the auto learning function
OFF: Runs the auto learning function
process parameter.


IMPORTANT Those except for the set items described here are strictly
banned from changing. Pay attention when implementing
set-ups.

menu Screen
Key/Item Function
G-Process Parameter Set the G-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd Image. Items that can
be changed here are following four items.
• “Basic LUT”
• “Rot. Value [x100]”
• “DL [x100]”
• “DH [x100]”
E-Process Parameter Set the E-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd-image. Items that can
be changed here are following three items.
• “Mask Size”
• “ß l”
• “ß h”
process parameter.

15 - 87
15.12.6 “Detailed Setting” Screen (5/5)

IMPORTANT Those except for the set items described here are strictly
banned from changing. Pay attention when implementing
set-ups.

menu Screen
Key/Item Function
F-Process Parameter • Set the G-process parameter respectively for main image and 2nd Image. Items that can
be changed here are following four items.
• “Basic LUT”
• “Rot. Value [x100]”
• “DL [x100]”
• “DH [x100]”
H-Process Parameter Set the H-process parameter respectively for main image and sub-image. Items that can
be changed here are following six items.
• “Preset E”
• “Preset F”
• “ß 1”
• “e ß l”
• “ß 2”
• “e ß h”
process parameter.

15.13 [Console] ＞ [Gateway]

15.13.1 Gateway to Others main menu screen
menu REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [Gateway]

This screen is used to set the ID-680SAN module.
When setting Gateway to Others to “ON” using Section 15.7, "[Console] > [Host]" or Section 15.8, "[Console] >
[RIS]" and then start up the CS-2, [Gateway] is displayed in “Option” in the Service Tool screen (Console).
Refer to Section 8.9.1, "Maker/Product Relation Table".
Key/Item Function
[MWM Controller Setting] Set to obtain patient information from a medical system or electronic medical record
system. This setting can be selected only when Gateway to Others is set to ON in
Section 15.8, "[Console] > [RIS]".
[Storage Controller Setting] Set to send images of Jpeg, etc. to an electronic medical record system. This setting
can be selected only when Gateway to Others is set to ON in Section 15.8, "[Console]
> [RIS]".
[Exit] Closes the main menu screen.

15 - 89
15.13.2 MWM Controller Setting screen
Key/Item Function
Setting MC
System Conf Set devices from which patient information is obtained.
"Sanyo Medicom (CS1:MWM)" ・・・・・・・・・ Sanyo Medicom Newve
"BML(CS1:MWM) [Patient DB search]" ・・・・・・ BML(Merits)
"Toshiba (MEPIO/CS1:MWM) [Patient DB search]" ・ Toshiba MEPIO
"Other: FTP/CS1:Detached" ・・・・・・・・・・・ General IF (DETACHED)
"Other: FTP/CS1:MWM [Patient DB search]" ・・・・ General IF (MWM)
"Other: FTP/CS1:MWM [File search]" ・・・・・・・ General IF (MWM)
Load the initial value of the system after setting the system configuration.
Setting MWM Set the following Patient/Study items when a setting other than “Other: FTP/CS1:
Detached" is set for the system configuration.
Set “MWM” in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen, Service Class.
Calling AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, REGIUS E-
Title.
Called AE-Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, RIS AE-Title.
Port Number Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen, Port Number.
Setting Medical Statement Set the following items when “Sanyo Medicom (CS2:MWM)" is set for the system
Computer configuration.
IP Address Set the IP address of the receiving computer.
Port Number Set the port number of the receiving computer.
Data Section Set the data segmentation of the receiving computer.
Setting FTP Set the following items when an item other than "Sanyo Medicom (CS2:MWM)" is set for
the system configuration.

Key/Item Function
Receive Folder Specify the folder to which the obtained patient information files are saved.
(Initial value:..\Ftp)
[．．． ] Display the browser used to select the received folder.
File Mask Set a part of the file name in the patient information file.
This setting is used to filter unnecessary files.
Save Folder Specify a file to save already used patient information files. (Initial value:..Ftp_save)
[．．． ] Display the browser used to select the Save folder.
File Extension Set the file type (extension) for the patient information file.
This setting is used to filter unnecessary files.
Punctuation Mark Specify the the code to separate search items.
Setting Detached Set the following items when "Other: FTP/CS1:Detached" is selected for the system
configuration.
Set “Detached” for the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) command screen, Service
Class, RIS AE-Title
Send AE Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, RIS AE-Title.
screen.
ReceiveAE Title Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS] (Patient/Study) DICOM screen, REGIUS AE-
Title.
ReceiveAE Title Always set "127.0.0.1".
Receive Port Number Set the value set in the [Console] > [RIS](Patient/Study) TCP/IP screen, Port Number.
CSV Setting Display the auto login setting screen for shared folders on the network.
[Detail] Display the Details Setup screen.
[Save] Apply the set content and closes the MWM Controller Setting screen .
[Cancel] Closes the MWM Controller Setting screen.

15 - 91
15.14 [Console] > [Patient DB]

15.14.1 “Patient DB Import” Screen
This tool is used to import the patient DB registered in the external DB, and reregister it in the CS-2’s internal patient DB.
Use this function in the following cases. (refer to "²Import Procedures of Patient DB", p.15-95 for import procedures)
• When only one CS-2 is present in the institute.
• When no RIS(IDS) is interfaced to the system.
• The existing device of the institute already has the patient DB, and CS-2 imports this DB at the time of installation.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [ [Console] --> [Patient DB]
Key/Item Function
DB Form Select the patient information file format which will be registered in the patient DB.
Separated Data: Handle the data up to the bound symbol as one identical item. Select the bound
symbol in the right menu. (comma or tab)
Specify the Start Byte: Select when specify the position of the item by means of byte count in the file.
Set Item Patient ID Click and select this item to load the patient ID.
Patient Name Click and select this item to load the alphabetical name.
Birth Date Click and select this item to load the birth day (y/m/d)
Sex Click and select this item to load the sex.
Read Start Position Input the position of each items in the file by byte.
• Will be displayed when “Bound Symbol” is selected for the read method.
Start Byte Input the start position of each item by byte.
• Will be displayed when “Specify Start Byte” is selected for the read method.
Read Byte Input the length of each item by byte.
• Will be displayed when “Specify Start Byte” is selected for the read method.
Birth Date Format Select the display format of the birthday from the list.
Male Input the code that expresses the sex of the patient for both male and female.
Female Checking default will use preset codes (male: m, female: f)
0 padding Input the digits of the patient ID. When the read patient ID has less digits than the setting, registers the
data with “0” added to the head. Input is enabled when the “Omit Head “0” is disabled.
Number Only Click this item to abstract and save the figure data only of the patient ID.
[w/o 0 Padding] Click this item to omit the head “0” and save the rest of the patient ID.
Space Correction Click this item to automatically add a space between family and given names of the patient. It also cuts
off unnecessary spaces.
[ASCII] Click this item to automatically convert the name to ASCII code and save it if original ASCII name is
not found.

Key/Item Function
[Get Data from DB] Reads the file in which the patient information is input, and registers it in the patient DB.
Displays the “Patient database” screen.
[Get Data from DB Partially reads the file in which the patient information is input, and verifies the format set up is correct
(Test)] or not. Displays a confirmation screen for the format of the read data.
[Restore] Loads the format which is already registered in the CS-2.
[Save Setting] Saves the set up of format in the CS-2.
[Exit] Exit the “BD Format Setting” screen.
15.14.2 “Patient Data Base” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Get Data from DB]
Key/Item Function
[Refer...] Displays the reference dialogue,. Select a holder where the patient information file (.dat) is
saved.
[Import] Reads the patient information file, and registers in the patient DB.
Progressive bar will be shown to indicate saving while registering.
Import All Files Check this item to read all files (.dat) stored in the holder that is selected in “Refer...”, and
to register in the patient DB.
[Exit] Exit the “Patient Database”.

15 - 93
15.14.3 “OK (Test Data Base)” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Get Data from DB (Test)]
Key/Item Function
Imported Test Data Base Imports the data base, and display the data base classified according to the format.
Error Log Displays errors when it failed to import the data base according to the format.
[Close] Exit the “OK (Test Data Base)” screen.

• Import Procedures of Patient DB

1. Load the Patient DB from the external device, and copy it onto a floppy disk.
• When copying, make sure to add “dat” to the file as an extension.
2. Set “DB Form” through “Sex” of “Patient DB Import” screen according to the data form of the patient DB.
3. Click [Save Setting] to save the setting.
4. Insert the floppy disk in which the patient DB has been copied, and click [Get Data from DB(Test)] of
“Patient DB Import” screen.
5. A dialogue querying whether to open file will be shown. Select the file that is copied in the step1, and click
[Open].
• Selected and loaded data will be shown on “OK(Test Data Base)” screen.
6. If the data is not read in correct form, check the data format of the copied data, and make necessary changes
on settings of “Patient DB Import” screen.
7. Repeat the step4 and 5 until the patient data base is correctly displayed on the “OK(Test Data Base)” screen.
8. Click [Get Data from DB].
9. Click [Refer. . .] of “Patient Database” screen, and select the file that is copied in the step1. Then click
[Open].
10. Click [Import] of “Patient Database” screen to register the patient DB in the CS-2's data base.
15.14.4 “Export Patient DB” Screen

This is a tool with which the patient information stored as Patient DB in the CS-2 can be output in text form.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Patient DB] --> [Export Patient DB] --> [OK]
Key/Item Function
File Name Displays the file name of the patient DB(text format) with path suffixed.
[File. . . ] Opens the dialogue, spoecify the file name and destination to export the file.
[Export] Executes the export of the file.
[Exit] Exit the “Export Patient DB” screen. “Export Patient DB” screen automatically closes when [Export] is
executed and completed.

15 - 95
15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]]
15.15 [Console] > [File Import], [Upgrade]]

15.15.1 “Install File” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [File Import]
Key/item Function
[...] (reference key) Select the holder where the install program resides. Normally select from “A”
drive (floppy disk drive).
[OK] The selected program will be decompressed.
[Cancel] Exit the “Install File” screen without selecting the file.
IMPORTANT Selecting the file and clicking [OK] on this screen will
decompress the file stored in the floppy disk and copy it
on the CS-2’s HDD. This, however does not update the
program software. Always use “Control Program” screen
to implement the program alteration (version change) .
15.15.2 “Control Program” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] --> [Upgrade]
Key/Item Function
The current installed A version list for the CS-2 application and Service Tool software that are installed on the
CS-2. Switches to the version that is selected here.
[OK] Executes the change of the version that is selected in the list.
[Cancel] Exit the “Control Program” screen without installing the program.

15.16 [Console] > [License]
15.16 [Console] > [License]

15.16.1 License Manager screen
menu REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Console] → [License]
Key/Item Function
[Append] Registers a new license key.
[Edit] Edits the registered license key.
[Delete] Deletes the registered license key.
[Import] Imports the license file generated by the license server.
[Save & Exit] Closes the License Manager screen.
[Cancel] Closes the License Manager screen without saving the settings.
IMPORTANT This screen is not used because the license key for all
functions is set by the factory setting.

15 - 97
15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”
15.17 [Reader] > [Reader] > “Dedicated Reader”

15.17.1 Common Displays of “CCU INFO” Screen
Key/Item Function
Reader Device Selection (upper left Select the reader device name to be set.
menu)
[Save & Exit] Click this button to exit from “ICU Info” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Click this button to exit from “ICU Info” screen without saving the setting.
15.17.2 “CCU INFO • TCP/IP” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Reader] --> select “TCP/IP” in the left menu)
Key/Item Function
TCP/IP
Host Name (Hosts) Input the host name of REGIUS 170 using 1 byte x 32 characters. (default: R170-0001)
Host Name (JM) Input the host name of REGIUS 170, which the JM uses, using 1 byte x 32 characters.
(default: r170-0001)
IP Address Input the REGIUS 170’s IP address. (default: 192.168.20.170)
Port Number (Reader) Input the REGIUS 170’s port No. (default: 8018)
Port Number (Console) Input the CS-2’s port No. (default: 8018)
Timeout 1 Do not change unless otherwise instructed. (default: 180000)

15.18 [Reader] > [Device Setup]

15.18.1 “Device Set” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Device] --> (select the reader name from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
PLL
Auto calculate ‘Mammo’ PLL Check to automatically calculate the PLL for mammo exposure (High Res.) from the PLL
value by ‘General’ PLL for standard exposure.
value.
General (velocity 1.5x) Input the PLL pixel clock for the pixels of main scan direction of High Res. exposure.
(standard: 3216)
• The relation between the pixels and the PLL set value is roughly expressed as ; Pixels
(87.5µm) = PLL Set Value x 1.3
Mammo (velocity 1.0x) Input the PLL pixel clock for the pixels of main scan direction of Mammo. exposure.
(standard: 2222)
• When “Calculate x1.0 PLL from x1.5 PLL” is disabled, input can be made.
Reader Start Point
Resolution Select the resolution for which the Reader Start Point is specified from “All”, “175mm
(Gen-Std.)”, “87.5mm (Gen-H/Mammo Std)”, “43.75mm (Mammo-H)”.
• When “All” is selected, input the pixels for high resolution.
Sign Select the shift direction of the read start position.
+: Toward H_sync
-: Recedes from H_sync
Pixels (High) Input the shift amount of read start position by “pixel count x 2”.
[Send] Sends the set up value to REGIUS 170.
[Table Refer...] Reads and displays the data stored in SCB (CF) of REGIUS 170.

15 - 99
• How to set the PLL

• Expose the 14” x 17"(14" x 14") cassette to produce solid density using high resolution mode, measure the
size of fluorescent substance using an inspection tool.
• Change the PLL so that the measured size of the fluorescent substance falls within the allowance (4096 pixels
-5 to +10).
• How to adjust the read start position

• Expose the 14" x 17" cassette in high resolution mode, and measure the blank margin of the plate of the
H_sync using an inspection tool.
• Set the code and pixel count so that the measurement falls within the allowance (30 to 45 pixels).
IMPORTANT Always implement the unevenness calibration whenever the PLL setting or read start position
setting is changed.

15.19 [Reader] > [PCB]
15.19 [Reader] > [PCB]

15.19.1 “REGIUS 170 PCB” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [PCB] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Backup Upload and save the data in REGIUS 170/190’s SCB (CF) onto the CS-2.
Restore Clicking “Console -> REGIUS170/190” will download the data stored in the
controller onto the REGIUS 170/190’s SCB (CF).
• Ticking “Program replacement for REGIUS170/190” when restoring the
board data onto the REGIUS 190/170, a new format data will be restored.
[Exit] Exit the “Change Board” screen.
• Data to be stored
• Shading data
• Sensitivity correction data
• PLL adjusting value
• Start origin
• Various setting data for network
• Mechanical counter info.

15 - 101
15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current]
15.20 [Reader] > [Std Current]

15.20.1 “Std. Current” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Std Current] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Reading Condition
Image Size Select the resolution for dummy reading from the following.
• “175µm(General Std)”, “87.5µm(Gen. H/Man. Std)”, “43.75µm(Mammo High)”
Standard Current Select the current value for dummy reading from the following.
• “0nA”, “50nA”, “500nA”, “50000nA”, “All”.
Unevenness Select the unevenness correction for dummy reading from the following.
• “ON”, “OFF”.
[Delete All Test] 1) Clicking on this button will display a dialogue confirming the deletion of the dummy
image.
2) Clicking “Yes” will delete only the dummy images at one time.
[Execution] Execute dummy reading with the standard current.
[Exit] Switches to “Reader” screen without implementing the dummy reading.

15.21 [Reader] > [Uneven. Cal.]

15.21.1 “Uniformity Corr.” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Uneven. Cal.] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Calibration
Resolution Select from “175µm(General Std)”, “87.5µm(Gen. H/Mammo Std)” and
“43.75µm(Mammo High)”.
PMT Use the default (2200)
Barcode Registration Use this function when the bar code registration is employed.
[OK] Starts uniformity correction.
Create Shipping Table Not to be used at the user. (do not tick the check).
(Factory use only)
Result Displays the result of uniformity correction.
[Table Control] Displays the information of uniformity calibration.
[Text File] Exports the result of uniformity calibration as a file.
[Exit] Exits the uniformity correction.
• Correction data
10 tables of correction data for each of “87.5µm”, “175µm”, “Mammography” (totally 3 types) per Pv (plate version) can be
registered. (total 30 tables) However, one table is for the use at the factory, in fact, there are 27 tables in total is available.
• Plate size
For calibration purpose, use the largest size that is actually used at the facility. (except mammography use). For the sizes
larger than the one used for calibration, the calibrated data is no more valid. As an example, the case where the calibration is
made using Pv00 + 14” x 17”, Pv01 + 10” x 12” is described in the following table.

15 - 103
Read Plate Size Plate Version Calibration Data to be applied

8” x 10” Pv01 Pv01+ 10” x 12”
14” x 17” Pv01 Pv00 + 14” x 17”
10” x 12” Pv00 Pv00 + 14” x 17”
• For mammography size, calibration can be done using a mammography cassette. (automatically recognized at the time of
bar code reading)
• Notes when implementing the uniformity calibration.

• Use the X-ray dose with bulb voltage 80kV, and mAs value to generates the signal value within the range
of 1500 ~ 3000STEP. Distance between the plate and bulb should be 2m or more.
• When the optical unit is replaced, delete all of old calibration data table before starting the calibration.

15.22 [Reader] > [Sensitivity]

15.22.1 “Sensitivity Corr.” Screen
Start up from the sytem Start up from the REGIUS Service
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Sensitivity] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Calibration
Auto Create Selecting this option enables to automatically create the calibration data for low
resolution using calibration data for high resolution.
Resolution When “Auto Create” is not selected, select the pixel size for sensitivity calibration.
• For regular cassette, select from the standard (175µm) or high resolution mode (auto-
create) (87.5µm).
• For mammo, always select “High Res.” or “Mammo High Res”.
Exposure Doxe Input the irradiation dose.
• 8 ~ 20mR (10mR or higher is recommended)
Sensitive Input “0.94” for regular cassette, “0.91” for mammo cassette.
• In “Auto Create” mode, sensitivity data for low resolution will be calculated using these
settings..
Barcode Registration Use only for “Bar Code Registration” is selected.
[OK] Executes the sensitivity calibration.
Create Shipping Table Not to be used at the user. (do not tick the check).
(Factory use only)
Low sensitivity QR value of the low sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 125)
Standard sensitivity QR value of the normal sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 250)
High sensitivity QR value of the high sensitivity region that shall be calibrated. (default : 500)
Result Displays the result of uniformity correction.p
[Table Control] Displays the correction data for the reader device.
• Lists all history of calibrations with Plate version (Pv), size, cassette in the past.
[Text File] Exports the result of calibration result as a file.
[Exit] Exits the sensitivity correction.

15 - 105
• Sensitivity calibration
• Regular (87.5µm, 175µm) or mammography/PCM cassette (87.5µm, 43.75µm) will be automatically recognized by
reading the barcode on the cassette.
• Selecting “Auto-Create Mode” will implement the calibration by reading at high resolution, and automatically create the
sensitivity data for low resolution. (calibration completes with one exposure)
• Use 14” x 17” film for regular (87.5µm, 175µµm) . (use the largest size that is actually used at the facility)
• Standard Exposure Dose : 10mR or higher is recommended (use the exposure dose at which the x-ray irradiation
becomes stable)
• Because the mammo plates and PCM plates have low sensitivity compared to regular plates, input in the “PMT” of the
“Sensitivity Correction” screen, the measured value x “α” so that it falls within the high valtage range of REGIUS 190/
170.
• Notes when implementing the sensitivity calibration of mammo cassette.

Because the sensitivity of the mammography plate is lower than the regular plate, calibration needs to be carried
out following the procedures below in order to bring the sensitivity level to suit to the high voltage range of the
REGIUS 190/170.
• Expose the plate with 20 ~ 30mR of exposure dose at the plate surface. Input in the “PMT” of “Sensitivity Calib” screen
the value calculated by actually measured X-ray dose multiplied by coefficient “α” when calibrating.
• Use the same X-ray bulb as that for the regular plate. (tungsten bulb)

15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs]
15.23 [Reader] > [Sub Logs]

15.23.1 “SubSystemLogs Create” Screen
IMPORTANT: This screen is only useful to create the sub system logs on the REGIUS 190/170. Use the “Reader Logs”screen
(REGIUS 190/170) to download the logs.
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Sub Logs]
Key/Item Function
[SubSystemLog Create] Creates sub system logs on the REGIUS 190/170.
[Exit] Exits the “Sub Logs Create” screen.
• SubSystemLog is the log produced from the signal process firmware on the MCB2/MCB and SCB2/SCB of
the REGIUS 190/170.

15 - 107
15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs]
15.24 [Reader] > [Reader Logs]

15.24.1 Common Displays of “Reader Log Info.” Screen
Key/Item Function
Reader Select Menu Select the reader device from which the log shall be collected.
[Recv. Log] Receives the log from the reader device.
[Send Log] Sends the settings to the reader device.
[Exit] Exit the “Reader Log Info.” screen after saving the setting.
[Cancel] Exit the “Reader Log Info.” screen without saving the setting.
15.24.2 “Reader Log Info.” Screen

IMPORTANT Implementing this function only will download the logs in
the network application of the CSB2/SCB on the REGIUS
170/190. However, the created sub-system log is also
downloaded when the sub-system log create is
implemented in advance. (refer to xxxxxx)

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Reader Logs] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Reader Select Select the REGIUS 170 from which the log shall be collected when there are several
reader devices are connected.
[Reader Log] Acquires the logs from the REGIUS 170.
[Exit] Exits the reader logs.

15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade]
15.25 [Reader] > [File Import], [Upgrade]

15.25.1 “Install File” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [File Import]
Key/item Function
[...] (reference key) Select the holder where the install program resides. Normally select from “A” drive (floppy
disk drive).
[OK] The selected program will be decompressed.
[Cancel] Exit the “Install File” screen after cancelling the selection of the file.
15.25.2 “Reader Program (change)” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Upgrade] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Key/Item Function
Version Indicates the program version which is currently running on the REGIUS 170.
The Current Installed Version list of the reader device’s programs stored in the CS-2. The program selected here
will be written in the reader device.
[OK] Execute the switch over to the program version listed in the reader program version list.
[Cancel] Exit the “Reader Program (change)” screen after cancelling the installation of program.

15 - 109
15.26 [Reader] > [Network]
15.26 [Reader] > [Network]

15.26.1 “Network” screen
Write the network information on the REGIUS 170 using this screen. Communicating with the REGIUS 170 in FTP mode
when the screen starts, displays the obtained REGIUS 170 information.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Reader] --> [Network] --> (select the reader from the “Reader Device” screen)
Name of currently
connected
REGIUS 170
Key/Item Function
Reader
Host Name Input the host name of the REGIUS 170. (default: r170-0001)
IP Address Input the IP address of the REGIUS 170. (default: 192.168.20.180)
Netmask Input the subnet mask of the REGIUS 170. (default: 255.255.255.0)
JM
Host List Input the name of JM which controls this REGIUS 170.
Hosts
Host List Displays the host name and IP address of CS-2s which are connected to this REGIUS.
[New] Click this button when newly inputting the host name and IP address of the CS-2 which
uses this REGIUS 170.
[Edit] Click this button to change the host name or IP address of the CS-2 listed on the “Host”
window
[Delete] Delete the CS-2 from the “Host” window.
[Send] Send the displayed set up to the REGIUS 170 in FTP mode.
[Exit] Exit the “Network”. No change will be caused on the REGIUS 170.

15.27 [Back up] > [System], [Image], [Log]

15.27.1 “System Setup File Save” Screen
Start up from the sytem Start up from the REGIUS Service A part of items can be used in the
menu Screen User Tool.
Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [System]
Key/Item Function
System Setup File Save
System Setup File Displays the list of system setting files that can be saved.
• In the User Tool, host setting/print setting/RIS setting/reader setting/ID card setting/
LUT/corr. data/Hosts files/Design files/patient DB/exam. DB are not displayed.
[>], [>>] [>] • • • Registers the items selected in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save”
[>>] • • • Registers all items shown in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save”
instantly by a single click.
Selected File for Save Displays the files which are registered to be saved.
[<], [<<] [<] • • • Excludes the files selected in “Selected File for Save” as non-saving items.
[<<] • • • Excludes all items shown in the “Selected File for Save” as non-saving items
[Save] Backs up the files in “Selected File for Save”onto the floppy disk.
[Exit] Exits the “System Setup File Save” screen.
IMPORTANT To maintain the conformity when executing a restore

operation, select and save the following files always in
pairs.
“Stamp Setting 1 (stamp setting)” and “Stamp Setting 2
(style setting)”

15 - 111
15.27.2 “Image File Save” Screen

Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [Image]
Key/Item Function
Save Option
All Check to select this option enables to backup all image data (image files, cropping
images, image headers).
• In the field for file selection, all image data will be listed.
Cropping Image Check to select this option enables to backup cropping images (and image headers).
• In the field for file selection, all cropping images will be listed.
Image Header Check to select this option enables to backup all header files.
• In the field for file selection, all header files will be listed.
File selection field List of files specified by “Save Option” will be shown in this field. Click and select the files
to be saved.
[Save] Implements backup of the image files selected in the file selection field.
[Exit] Exits the “Image File Save” screen.

15.27.3 Log Manager screen

This screen is used to display and save the HIPAA log.
This screen can be displayed regardless of the setting of the login management mode.
Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [HIPAA Log]
Key/Item Function
[Save] Saves the HIPAA log.
• After saving, a confirmation screen appears asking whether to delete the HIPAA log.
Click Yes to delete the HIPAA log; click No to not delete the HIPAA log.
[Display] Displays the current HIPAA log contents.
[Delete] Deletes the HIPAA log.
[Exit] Exits the Log Manager screen.

15 - 113
15.27.4 “Log File Save” Screen

menu REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Backup] --> [Log]

Saves both basic logs and error logs. Specify the date for error logs.
Key/Item Function
Error Log File List Displays the log files stored on the CS-2 in order of date (starting from the oldest)
Click to select the error log file in the list to be saved.
• Clicking the files with <Shift> key depressed enables to select several files in series at a time.
• Clicking the files with <Ctrl> key depressed enables to individually select several files at a
time.
Total Displays the total Bytes of the files selected in the “Error Log File List” in “KByte”.
[Save] Saves in the specified folder, “Basic Logs” and the logs selected in the list.
[Exit] Exits the “Log File Save” screen.

15.28 [Restore] > [System], [Image]

15.28.1 “System Setup File Restore” Screen
Start up from the sytem Start up from the REGIUS Service A part of items can be used in the
menu Screen User Tool.
Display Procedure • • • [Restore] --> [System]
Key/Item Function
Look in
Folder Name Input a folder name where a set up file to be restored exists. (default: A:)
or click [Browse. . .] to display the folder name where the target file exists.
[Browse. . .] Displays the dialogue in which you can specify the restore-origin folder.
System Setup File Restore
System Setup File Displays the list of system set up files that are stored in the folders listed in “Look in”.
Click to select the file in the list to be restored.
[>], [>>] [>] • • • Register the items selected in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save”.
[>>] • • • Register all items shown in “System Setup File” onto “Selected File for Save”
Selected File for Save Displays the files which are registered to be restored.
[<], [<<] [<] • • • Excludes the files selected in “Selected File for Save” as non-restore items.
[<<] • • • Excludes all items shown in the “Selected File for Save” as non-restore items
[Restore] Clicking on this button while minimum 1 file exists in “Selected File for Save”, initiates
restore.
[Exit] Exits the “Setup File Restore” screen.
Key/Item Function
Look in

15 - 115
15.28.2 “Image File Restore” Screen

Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Restore] --> [Image]
Key/Item Function
Restore File Select Field Displays a list of image files stored in the restore-origin folder (default: A:).
Click to select the image file to be restored.
• Clicking the files with <Shift> key depressed enables to select several files in series at a
time.
• Clicking the files with <Ctrl> key depressed enables to individually select several files at
a time.
[Restore] Click this button after selecting the image data you want to restore, from the image data
list displayed on the screen.
[Exit] Exits the “Image File Restore” screen.
[Browse ...] Select the folder where exists the image data to be restored.

15.29 [Adjustment] > [Touch Panel], [Brightness]

15.29.1 “Brightness” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness]
Key/Item Function
[1. Measurement of the display] Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • property measurement.
[2. LUT making for the display] Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • LUT creation.
[Option Setting] Clicking on this button displays the screen for monitor correction • option setting.
[Exit] Exits the “Display Calibration Tool” screen.

15 - 117
15.29.2 “Brightness • Prop. Measure” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [1. Measurement of the display]
• Auto Mode Screen

This screen will be shown when the “Auto mode” is selected in Section 15.29.4, "“Bright. Adjustment • Option
Setting” Screen".
Key/Item Function
[Start] • Clicking on this button with the luminance meter connected automatically starts
measurement. (refer to Section 12.6, "Adjusting the Luminance of CS-2 Operation
Unit".
[Cancel] Exit the “Auto mode” screen without implementing the luminance measurement.

• Manual Mode Screen

This screen will be shown when the “Manual mode” is selected in Section 15.29.4, "“Bright. Adjustment • Option
Setting” Screen".
Key/Item Function
<Luminance> Input the measurement value of the luminance meter.
[NEXT (click after inputting the Brightness of the target increases as the button is clicked.
luminance)]
Step Displays the luminance step of the target.
Pixel Value Displays the pixel value of the target.
[End] Completes the measurement and exits the “Manual mode” screen.
[Cancel] Cancels the brightness measurement, and exits the “Manual mode” screen without
completing the measurement.
15.29.3 “Bright. Adjustment• LUT making for the display” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [2. Create Monitor LUT]
Key/Item Function
Convert Method Select the conversion method using a radio button.

15 - 119
Key/Item Function
GSDF conversion (input: P Creates LUT using the GSDF conversion when the image pixels bear P value.
Value)
Lightness linear conversion Creates LUT using the lightness linear conversion.
(input: P Value)
Liner LUT
[Convert/Save]] Convert and save the monitor LUT obtained from the measurement.
• Clicking on this button displays the dialogue, allowing you to set the output
destination to which the LUT will be applied.
• "Set Smooth" screen will be shown following the dialogue for setting the output
destination when "Luminance Equiv. Conv." is selected.
[Exit] Exit the “LUT Making for Display” screen.
15.29.4 “Bright. Adjustment • Option Setting” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Brightness] --> [Option Setting]
Key/Item Function
Method Auto mode • • • Normally select this.
Manual mode• • • Select this when the communication cannot established between the CS-2
and the luminance meter due to the reason such that a luminance meter other than specified is
used.
Auto Mode Communicating with the luminance meter, and automatically carry out the luminance
measurement.
• Normally select this.
Manual Mode Input the measured luminance, and measure the monitor luminance manually.
• Select this method in the case that the luminance meter cannot communicate with the CS-2
due to the incompatibility in communication, etc.
Display Reflection Auto mode • • • Normally select this.
Luminance Manual mode• • • Select this when the communication cannot established between the CS-2
Measurement and the luminance meter due to the reason such that a luminance meter other than specified is
used.
Yes/No No fixed.
COM port Select the communication port from the following when required.
• Always select “COM2”(fixed) with current version.
Steps Input the luminance steps of auto-measurement.

Key/Item Function
[Luminance meter check] Click this button to check the communication status of the luminance meter.
[Exit] Exits the “Option Setting” screen after saving the changes in setting.

15 - 121
15.30 [Adjustment] > [Delete Image], [Delete All]

15.30.1 “Delete Image” Screen
IMPORTANT Using the function of this screen, protected images are
also deleted. Pay full attention when selecting the image
to be deleted.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Delete Image]
Key/Item Function
Image Select List Displays a list of images stored in the HDD.
Click to select the file to be deleted in the list .
[Delete] The image selected in the “Image Select List” will be deleted. Clicking on this button
displays a confirmation dialogue.
[Exit] Exits the “Image File Delete” screen.

15.30.2 “Delete All” Dialogue

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Delete All]
Key/Item Function
[Yes] Deletes all image data stored in the HDD.
[No] Cancels the delete operation.

15 - 123
15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup], [Restore], [Log], [Initialize]
15.31 [Adjustment] > [Configure], [Backup],

[Restore], [Log], [Initialize]
15.31.1 “PostgreSQL access” Screen
A launcher screen in the “PostgreSQL access” tool for engaging the CS-2 to the JM.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Configure]

Key/Item Function
c_status The list of the CS-2(s) that are under control of the JM. Use this screen to delete or add the CS-2.
“c_stat” displays the current status of each CS-2 by numbers.

2: Power OFF
1: Reading
0: Ready
-1: Error
r_status A list in which all REGIUS 170s under the control of the JM are shown. Use this screen to delete or
add the REGIUS 170.
“r_stat” displays the current status of each REGIUS 170 by numbers.

3: Standby
2: Power OFF
1: Reading
0: Ready
-1: Error

15 - 125
Key/Item Function
r_version Displays the firmware version, date of update of the REGIUS 170 that is controlled by the JM.
“version” displays the current firmware version of each REGIUS 170.

“up_time” displays the date when the update was made to that version.
relations A list in which all REGIUS 170s under the control of the JM are shown. Use this screen to delete or
add the REGIUS 170.
“alert” displays the controls between the related CS-2 and REGIUS 170 by numbers.
1: Power control, transfer of error information.
0: Only power control. Error information will not be transferred.

Key/Item Function
sys_config Displays the cassette registration method.
Set the bar code registration or manual registration on this screen.
“reg_type” displays the cassette registration type by numbers.

1: Manual registration.
0: Bar code registration.
15.31.2 Back Up of JM Information

Backs up the database set on the JM in the floppy disk.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Backup]

Upon selecting this, back up will immediately start.
• When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the data base will be backed up onto the floppy
disk and specific holder of the F drive.
• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up.
15.31.3 Restore of JM Information

Restores the JM data base from the floppy disk (or F drive).

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Restore]

Upon selecting this, restore will immediately start.
• When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the data base will be restored from the floppy
disk.

15 - 127
15.31.4 JM Log Save

Collects and save the JM log in the floppy disk (and F drive).

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Log]

Upon selecting this, saving will immediately start.
• When a floppy disk has been inserted in the floppy disk drive, the log will be backed up onto the floppy disk
and specific holder of the F drive.
• No operation screen. Command prompt to show the progress will be shown during back up
15.31.5 JM Initialize
Initialize the JM data base, and restores the initial condition as it was when delivered.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Adjustment] --> [Initialize]

Upon selecting this, initialization will immediately start.

15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping]
15.32 [Analyze] > [Ping]

15.32.1 “Network Diagnosis” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Ping]
Key/Item Function
Device Select the device that should be diagnosed.
Service Select the socket of the device to be diagnosed.
• Necessary to select the socket if hosts or printers are selected as the external device.
Host Name Display the host name of the selected external device.
IP Address Display the IP address of the selected external device.
[Ping] Displays the result of Ping.
• If an error occurs on the network, the error contents will be shown.
[Exit] Exits the "Network Diagnosis” screen.
Status Function

15 - 129
15.33 [Analyze] > [Image] (exam. tool)

15.33.1 “Mainte” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
Key/Item Function
(1) Menu
File (F) Reads the image file, prints the image, etc.
Display (V) Sets the contrast, changes the image size, depicts and deletes the grid lines.
Analyze (A) Displays the histogram of the image data, horizontal and vertical profiles.
Measure (M) Measures the MTF of the image data, S-sensitivity, unevenness correction.
Help (H) Displays the version information.
(2) Cursor Line* Indicate the current cursor position by means of lines.
(3) Selecting Rectangular* Displays the rectangular that will select the information area on the histogram,
horizontal and vertical profile.
• While the cursor line is displayed, drag the mouse with the mouse’s right button
being pressed to change size and position of the rectangular.
(4) Mouse Position* Mouse’s current position is indicated by X, Y- axis. During the mouse being dragged,
origin of axis is shown on the left, and the current axis of the cursor position is shown
on the right.
(5) Scroll Bar The scroll bar will be displayed when the image cannot be displayed within the main
image frame.
• This bar is interlocked with the scroll bar of the horizontal and vertical profile.
* They will not be displayed when there is no cursor on the main image frame, or when there is no dialogue
for histograms or horizontal and vertical profile is shown.

• File (F)
Menu Item Function

Open (O) Displays the file selection dialogue, and displays the selected file.
Save as BMP file (A)... Displays the holder selection dialogue, and save the currently displayed image in
BMP file format.
Save a portions as IMG file Select the area on the image, and save the image within this area.
Print (P)... Displays the print dialogue, and prints the current status that is shown on the desk
top.
Print Preview (V) Displays the printed image.
Printer Setup (R)... Displays the printer Info. dialogue, and changes the printer properties.
Exit (X) Exit from the Exam. Tool.
• Display (V)
• The submenu can only be selected when an image file is open.
Menu Item Function

Density / Contrast (C) Displays the “Den.• Cont. Setting” screen.
Display Size (V) 1/1 Image (N) Displays the image data by 1 to 1.
1/2 Image (H) Displays the image data by 1 to 2.
All Image (A) Displays the whole image by applying appropriate skipping ratio.
Grid (G) Draw (D) Displays the grid lines (100 pixels/scale)
Clear (C) Erase the currently displayed grid lines.
remove cross-scan unevenness Displays screens after performing Vertical Scanning Unevenness Correction.
Key Area Displays the Key Area.
Key Area (G) Applying “G” processing to the displayed image according to the parameteres
contained in the additional information for exposure, and opens the “ROI”
screen.
Status Bar (S) Switches the display of mouse position ON/OFF

15 - 131
• Analysis (A)
• Selectable only when an image file is displayed.
Menu Item Function

Histogram (H) Displays the histogram dialogue.
Profile (Horizontal) (S) Displays the horizontal profile dialogue.
Profile (vertical) (V) Displays the vertical profile dialogue.
• Measure (M)
• Selectable only when an image file is displayed.
Menu Item Function

MTF Measurement... (M) Displays the MTF measurement screen.
S Measurement of S Sensitivity... (S) Displays the S-sensitivity measurement screen.
Measure unevenness after calibrate Displays the unevenness measurement screen after the correction.
(H)
15.33.2 “Contrast” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Display (V)] --> “Density / Contrast (C)”
Key/Item Function
Black: Allows the input of max. signal value and its display.
• Set the value by inputting the value or using the slider. (input range: 0 ~ 4095)
White: Allows the input of min. signal value and its display.
Center: Allows the input of med. signal value and its display.
• Setting the min. signal value > max. signal value will reverse the B&W of the image.

15.33.3 “ROI” Screen

Displays the specified part of the image by applying a color.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Display (V)] --> “Key Area”
Key/Item Function
Interested Specify the density which you want to display in color.
Color Specify the surrounding border with the Key Area in center.
15.33.4 “Histogram” Screen

Displays the frequency distribution of the area selected by the rectangular on “Main” screen.

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Analysis] --> “Histogram (H)”
Display Function
Min: Displays the min. signal value within the rectangular.
Max: Displays the max. signal value within the rectangular.
Ave: Displays the ave. signal value within the rectangular.
S.D.: Displays the standard deviation within the rectangular.
Mid: Displays the median within the rectangular.
Histogram Displays the histogram by assuming the most popular signal value within the rectangular as “1”.

15 - 133
15.33.5 “Hor. & Ver. Profile” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Analysis (A)] --> “Profile (Horizontal) (S)” or “Profile (Vertical)
(V)”
(1)
(2)
(5) (4)
(1) (3) (3)
(2) (4) (6) (7)

(5)
(6) (7)
Key/Item Function
(1) Profile Data Displays the average profile of the line selected on the main image.
(2) Cursor Line Displays the lines corresponding to axis where the current position of the cursor
locates.
(3) Selecting Rectangular Selecting any part of the profile information will allow you to find the min. and max.
signal value within the selected area. Selecting procedures are same as that for the
main image.
(4) Scroll Bar Scrolls the profile info. display. This bar is interlocked with the one for the main image.
(5) Mouse Position Displays the mouse position when it is being dragged.
Upper • • • Displays the origin of the rectangular.
Lower • • • Displays the current position of the cursor.
(6) Max./min. Signal Value Min. • • • Displays the minimum signal value within the rectangular.
Max. • • • Displays the maximum signal value within the rectangular.
(7) Select Rectangular Start/ Upper • • • Displays the start point line of the rectangular.
End Lower • • • Displays the end point line of the rectangular.

15.33.6 “MTF Measurement” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Measure (M)] --> “MTF Measurement (M)”
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5)
Key/Item Function
(1) Max. Signal Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm Displays the maximum signal value for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm each.
(2) Min. Signal Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm Displays the minimum signal value for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm each.
(3) [Execute] Clicking on this button while both maximum and minimum signal values are
displayed will initiate the MTF measurement.
(4) [Clear] Clears the displayed or input items.
(5) MTF Value of 0 lp/mm ~ 2.0 lp/mm Displays the MTF measurement for 0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0lp/mm.
• Measuring Method of 0 lp/mm Data
Display the histogram screen, then click the input box for 0 lp/mm of the MTF measurement screen. After confirming that
the cursor ( | ) is displayed in the box, select the max. and min. measurement area for 0 lp/mm on the main image. As the area
is selected, its average value will be shown in the input area.
• Measuring Method of 0.5 ~ 2.0 lp/mm

Display the horizontal • vertical profile screen, then click the input box for 0.5 lp/mm of the MTF measurement screen. After
confirming that the cursor ( | ) is displayed in the box, select the max. and min. measurement area for 0.5 ~ 2.0 lp/mm on the
main image. As the area is selected, its average value will be shown in the input area.

15 - 135
15.33.7 “Measure: S Sensitivity Measure” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Image] --> [Measure (M)] --> “S-Sen. Measure (S)”
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Key/Item Function
(1) S Value Select the S-value from 25, 100, 200, 400, 800.
(2) Line Val [mR] Input the X-ray dose.
(3) Measure Area Input the pixels for each side (up/down, R/L), which should be excluded from the measuring
[Except Img] area
(4) [Execute] Execute the S-sensitivity measurement.
(5) [Clear] Clear the items displayed or input.
(6) S Sensitive... Displays the measured S-sensitivity.
(7) Ave S Val Displays the measured average signal value • standard deviation.
(8) Static Displays “Calculating” during measurement, and “reference value” after the measurement.

15.33.8 “Measure: Corrected Mural Measure” Screen

menu REGIUS Service
Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze/Diagnosis] → [Image] → "Measure (M)" → "Measure unevenness after Calibrate (H)"
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Key/Item Function
(1) Measure area [pixel out] Input the pixels for each side (up/down, R/L), which should be excluded from the
measuring area
(2) [Execute] Execute the S-sensitivity measurement.
(3) [Clear] Clear the items displayed or input.
(4) Ave Signal Val: Displays the measured average signal value.
(5) Variance Displays the measured distribution.
(6) Static Displays “Calculating” during measurement, and “measured result” after the
measurement.

15 - 137
15.34 [Analyze] > [App Log], [Sys Log]

15.34.1 “Application Log” Screen
menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [App Log]
Key/Item Function
[Open] Select the date of the log that you want to display.
• Displays the read list dialogue on which the dates and logs are listed.
[Search] Clicking on this button will display a dialogue for setting the term within which the logs are collected.
• Displays the search screen
[CSV File] Outputs the collected logs in CSV file format.
Log File List Displays the list of logs which are screened by date or other conditions.
[Exit] Exits the “Application Log” screen.

15.34.2 “Search” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [App Log] --> [Search]
Key/Item Function
Period
Period Set the time range in which the events occurred and to be displayed.
Check “Period”, and set the time range for the events.
Start/End Set the start and end time for specific event.
Device
Processing Displays the events of specific device.
Check “Device”, and select the device for which the events shall be displayed.
Device Check the device name for which the event shall be displayed.
Description
Description Displays the event which has an specific character strings in the message.
Check “Description”, and input the character string to be searched.
Character Strings Input the character string to be searched.
Operation Log
Operation Log Check to displays the work log only.
[OK] Exits the “Search Option” screen after completing the search.
The events searched with the specific condition will be shown in the application log field.
[Cancel] Exit the “Search Option” screen without completing the search.
• When several search conditions are set, only the event that satisfies the all search condition will be shown.

15 - 139
15.34.3 “System Log Info.” Screen

menu Screen
Display Procedure • • • [Analyze] --> [Sys Log]
Key/Item Function
“System Log Select” Menu Select the log type from below, which categorizes the logs created during the exposure.
Reader1 Read Info. • • • Displays the total cassette read on each reader device.
Reader1 Counter2 • • • Displays the total image cont that has been read in the past.
Edit Image Counter • • • Displays the image count that has been changed in processing
method.
Image Output Counter • • • Displays the already output count for each output destination.
Error Counter • • • Displays the error occurred on the CS-2 in the past with classification
according to the error contents.
Log List Field Displays the list of information that is selected in the system log select menu.
[Reset] Set the count such as sheet count to “0”.
• Clicking on this button displays a confirming dialogue.
[CSV File] Outputs the event logs displayed on the event logs details column in CSV file format.
[Exit] Exits the “SystemLog Info.” screen.

16 Appendix
This section describes technical information that
can be helpful for the installation work and
installation procedures for the optional wall type
operation unit.
16.1 List of Differences

Differences (Service Tool, functions) between CS-1 and CS-2 are as follows.
16.1.1 Service Tool

CS-1/CS-3 Screen Settings CS-2
System Date/Time System Screen 全般
Network Setting Screen Registration
Screen Setting Screen Display Examination Result
Patient Display Examination List
Routine Display Image Confirmation
Reservation List Examination History
Portable System Info
Examination History Input/Output Job Manager
System Info Printer
Console Input/ Job Manager Host
Output Printer RIS Patient/Study
Host Con Result
Console
RIS Patient/Study sole Overlay Density (altered from “Marker”)

Result Stamp
Overlay Marker Exposure Exam. Tag
Stamp Processing Parameter
Exposure Exam. Tag Option Gateway
Processing Parameter
Option Gateway
680X Patient OB Patient DB Registration
Patient OB Patient DB Patient DB Output
Registration Program License
Patient DB Output Install
Program License Program
Install
Program
System Reader REGIUS170
System Reader REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550
System Setup REGIUS170
System Setup REGIUS170
PCB Change REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550
Calibration Reference Current REGIUS170
PCB Change REGIUS170
Unevenness Correction REGIUS170
Reader
REGIUS350/550
Sensitivity Correction REGIUS170
Calibration Reference REGIUS170
Current Log SubSystemLogs Create REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550
Reader Log REGIUS170
Unevenness REGIUS170
Correction Program Install REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550
Reader
Program REGIUS170
Sensitivity REGIUS170
Correction REGIUS170 Network
REGIUS350/550
Log SubSystemLog REGIUS170
s Create REGIUS350/550
Reader REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550
: Deleted tool
Program Install REGIUS170
Italic : Changed tool
REGIUS350/550
Program REGIUS170
REGIUS350/550

16-1
System System System System
Backup
Backup
Image Image Image Image
Log HIPAA log Log HIPAA log
Log Log
Restore
System System
Restore
System System
Image Image Image Image
Screen Touch Panel Screen Brightness Adjustment

Brightness Adjustment Image Deletion of Image
Image Deletion of Image System Deletion of All Data
Adjustment
System Deletion of All Data Job Manager Setting
Adjustment
Job Manager Setting Backup

Backup Restore
Restore Log Collection
Log Collection Initialization
Initialization
PDA PDA Tool
Network Ping Backup Network Ping
Image WS Image Image
Image Log Application Log

System Log
MTF
Log Application Log : Deleted tool
System Log Italic : Changed tool
REGIUS350/550 Self-DiagnosisÇP
Console > System > Date/Time Use User Utility > System Info. Edit Screen > Change date/time
Console > System > Network Use WindowsXP > Control Panel > Property of local area connection.
Adjustment > Screen > Touch Panel Use WindowsXP > Control Panel > TouchWare.

16.1.2 Function
Function Comparison between CS-2 and CS-1
Function CS-2 CS-1/CS-3 Remarks 　

Screen Keyboard Yes Yes
Keyboard Yes Yes
Local Disk Patient DB Yes Yes
Yes Yes
External Patient/ Standard Yes Yes
Option
Exam DB Backup Yes Yes
DICOM DETACHED Yes Yes
When multiple orders are found
Order DICOM MWM Yes Yes because of search condition, only 300
Registration items from the beginning are valid.
DICOM MPPS Yes Yes
Special protocol ⇔ DICOM conversion
Special Protocol Yes Yes is performed by the other maker link-
age module (ID-680SAN).
Number of registered
No limit No limit
examinations
Number of exposures 32 (to V2.00R02)
128
per exam 128 (from V2.00R03)
REGIUS 170 x 2 32 items Approx 1000 items
Exposure
Quantity REGIUS 350 － Approx. 800 items
Exam. Tag
REGIUS 550 － Approx. 800 items
Yes Yes
REGIUS 170 No. of units that can be No. of units that can be
connected: 2 connected: 16
Yes
Connected Leader REGIUS 350 No No. of units that can be
connected: 1
Yes
REGIUS 550 No No. of units that can be
connected:1
Post-registration Yes Yes
Cassette registration
Auto-registration Yes No
method
Pre-registration Yes Yes
8 x 10 inch Yes Yes
10 x 12 inch Yes Yes
Image Read
Size 17X17 No Yes
18X24 Mammography Yes Yes
24X30 Mammography Yes Yes
18X24 Yes Yes
24x30 Yes Yes
15x30 Yes Yes
175µm Yes Yes
87.5µm Yes Yes
Sampling pitch
No (CS-1)
43.75µm Yes Option, overseas only
Yes (CS-3)
Can be changed wit in the range of low
Low sensitivity 125 Yes Yes
sensitivity 125 ≦ QR ＜ 250
QR value Standard sensitivity 250 Yes Yes
Can be changed within the range of
High sensitivity 500 Yes Yes
high sensitivity 250 ＜ QR ≦ 500
PCM No Yes
Console built-in Yes Yes
Job Manager Special Yes Yes
Backup function Yes Yes
Condition Setting No Yes
General model
Result Acquisition No Yes
X-ray Generator
Condition Setting －－
Mammography model
Result Acquisition No Yes

16-3

Subject recognition
Yes No
Processing
Auto-gradation
Yes Yes
processing
S value Yes Yes
Adjustment G value Yes Yes
ROI No Yes
Yes Yes
Routine Image E processing Cannot be changed from Processing OFF/ON,
Procesing Exam. Tag setting Parameter adjustment
Yes Yes
Image emphasis F processing Cannot be changed from Processing OFF/ON,
Exam. Tag setting Parameter adjustment
Yes Yes
H processing Cannot be changed from Processing OFF/ON,
Exam. Tag setting Parameter adjustment
Yes Yes
Blackening of out of
Processing OFF/ON Processing OFF/ON,
irradition field
only shape adjustment
Yes Yes
Name Printer, HOST common Printer, HOST 5 patterns
Annoation 1 patterns each
Marker No Yes
Scale No Yes
Configuration (no. of Standard printer 1 Yes Yes The standard software (overseas) pro-
units that can be Standard printer 2 No Yes vides only 1 channel, either printer or
connected） Backup printer Yes Yes HOST and the 2nd channel is optional.
DICOM BASIC PRINT Yes Yes
Protocol
DICOM presented LUT Yes Yes
1 frame Yes Yes
Printer Output 1 image processin g 2 No exposure Exam. Tag is provided
Yes Yes
frames and the format set in the image confir-
Format 2 images 2 frames Yes Yes mation sreen is followed.
4 frames Yes No The format is kept until the user
Direct output Yes Yes change it.
Entire output Yes Yes
Trimming Position
Yes Yes
Fine Adjustment
Standard HOST １ Yes Yes
Configuration The standard software (overseas) pro-
Standard HOST ２ Yes Yes
（Number of units that vides only 1 channel, either printer or
ca be connected） Standard HOST ３ No Yes HOST and the 2nd channel is optional.
Backup HOST Yes Yes
DICOM CR image
Yes Yes
STORAGE
HOST Output DICOM DX image image
Yes Yes
STORAGE
Protocol DICOM MG image
Yes Yes
STORAGE
DICOM storage consign-
Yes Yes
ment
DICOM GSPS Yes Yes
G processing Yes Yes
Image E processing Yes Yes
processing F processing Yes Yes
H processing Yes Yes
Image Manual adjustment
No Yes
processing （User tool）
Method
parameter
adjustment Auto Learning Yes No
Examination Number of past No limit
No limit Depends on HDD capacity
History examination saved
User registration/
Yes Yes
User Management Deletion
HIPAA Login/Logoff Yes Yes
Log output Yes Yes
Log Management
Log display/Save/Delte Yes Yes
Remote
Yes Yes Domestic specification
Maintenance


Portable mode No Yes (CS-3)
MWM/FTP/DETATCH Yes Yes (CS-3)
MPPS/DETATCH Yes Yes (CS-3)
HQ Mammography Yes Yes (CS-3)
DICOM Output
Yes Yes (CS-3)
Additional #1
Option DICOM Output
Yes Yes (CS-3)
Additional #2
DICOM Output
Yes Yes (CS-3)
Package
Stitching Yes Yes (CS-3)
Image Sharing Yes Yes
Data Analysis Yes Yes

16-5
16.2 Stamp Item Selection List

The Exam Tag Conversion table is comprised of the following data.
ITEM Selectable ITEM Selectable
Display Display
Form (refer Form (refer
to the table to the table
in the right) in the right)
Study Date B X-ray Tube Current A A (Undefined)
Image Date B Exposure A Convert to Hex
Study Time C Rectification Type A 2-byte Character
Image Time C Image Area Dose Prod A Divide 100
Accession Number A Filter Type A Decimal down 2
Institution Name A Pixel Spacing-Row A OFF/ON
Institution Address A Pixel Spacing-Col A Yes/No
Referring Physician D Grid A Marker Position
Station Name A Focal Spot A Sex Entry
Department Name A Anode Material A No Sex Entry
Recording Physician D Breast Thickness A
Performing Physician D Pressure A B "Date(JP-YYYY)"
Reading Study Phys. D Phosphor Type A "Date(JP-YY)"
Operator's Name D Cassette Orientation A "Date(JP-JP)"
DiagnosesDescription A Read Size A "Date(US-YYYY)"
Model Name A Detector Primary Angle A "Date(US-YY)"
Patient's Name D View Position A "Date(US-JP)"
Patient ID A Sensitivity A
Patient's Birth Date B Detector ID A C "Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)"
Patient's Birth Time C Grid Absorb.Material A "Time(JP-HH+MM)"
Patient's Sex A Grid SpacingMaterial A "Time(US-HH+MM+SS)"
Other Patient ID A Grid Thickness A "Time(US-HH+MM)"
Other Patient Names D Grid Pitch A
Patient's Age E Grid AspectRatio-V A D Personal name alphabet
Patient's Height A Grid AspectRatio-H A
Patient's Weight A Grid Focal Distance A E "Age(old)"
Medical Alerts A Filter Material A
Contrast Allergies A Filter Thickness Min A
Ethnic Group A Filter Thickness Max A
Occupation A Exposure Ctrl Mode A
Add. Patient History A Exposure Status A
Pregnancy Status A Study Instance UID A
Patient Comments A Series Instance UID _
Contrast/Bolus Agent A Study ID A
Body Part Examined A Series Number A
KVP A Instance ID A
Serial Number A Pat. Orientation-1st A
Software Versions A Pat. Orientation-2nd A
C/B Route A Laterality A
C/B Volume(cm3) A Image Laterality A
C/B Start Time C Other Study ID A

ITEM Selectable ITEM Selectable

Display Display
Form (refer Form (refer
to the table to the table
in the right) in the right)
C/B Stop Time C Image Comment A A (Undefined)
C/B Total Dose Num. of Image _ Convert to Hex
Field of View-Col Contrast Flow Rate A 2-byte Character
Mag. Factor (x100) A Contrast Flow Dur. A Divide 100
Field of View Shape A C/B Ingredient A Decimal down 2
Field of View-Row A C/B Concentration A OFF/ON
Source-Patient [mm] A QC Image A Yes/No
Reason for Study A Study Priority A Marker Position
Requesting Physician D Sched.StudyStartDate B Sex Entry
Requesting Service A Sched.StudyStartTime C No Sex Entry
Study Comments A Refer. Pending A
Special Needs A Study Pending A B "Date(JP-YYYY)"
Cur. Patient Location A Host Pending A "Date(JP-YY)"
Pat. Residence(Ward) A Output Device A "Date(JP-JP)"
Patient State A Img Confirm mode A "Date(US-YYYY)"
Total Exposure Dur. A Source-Detector [mm] A "Date(US-YY)"
Total Exposure Num. _ Input Distinguish A "Date(US-JP)"
Exposure Time Img Confirm screen
Entrance Dose A Internal Img No. A C "Time(JP-HH+MM+SS)"
Exposed Area A Mag.mode(integer) _ "Time(JP-HH+MM)"
Source-Entrance [mm] A Mag.mode(float) _ "Time(US-HH+MM+SS)"
Radiation Comments _ ExamTag Group A "Time(US-HH+MM)"
Transport Arrange. _ ExamTag Name A
Recipients of Result D LUT Name _ D Personal name alphabet
Placer Order Number _ DL(G-Process) _
Filler Order Number _ DH(G-Process) A E "Age(old)"
Inc. Plane Dose(mGy) A S-Value A
Pat.Confidentiality A G-Value A
Medium Type _ Shift A
Film Size ID _ Rotate A
Number of Films _ E ON/OFF A
Set Exam Tag Num A F ON/OFF A
Set Page Name A E bl A
Set Group Name A E bh A
Set Tag Name A E MaskSize A
User Exam Tag Num A F b1 A
User Page Name A F b2 A
User Group Name A F MaskSize A
User Tag Name A H ID (HE or HF) A
XrayCtrlCode A HF-STANDARD A
Tube Num A HE-STANDARD A
AEC Position _ HF-b2 A
Guard A HF-b1 A
Rows A HE-bh A
Columns A HE-bl A

16-7
16.3 How to Make Exam Tag Conversion Table

Structure of Exam Tag Conversion Exam Tag Conversion table is comprised of the following data.
Table
Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4...
The data in each row implies the following depending on the type
selected by “Convert Source Code” of “Exam Tag” on “RIS INFO
(Modality Worklist)” screen.
“Reserved Code System”

1st Row (0040,0100) Reserved Process Step Sequence
>(0040,0008) Reserved Implement Item Code Sequence
>>(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor
2nd Row (0040,0100) Reserved Process Step Sequence
>(0040,0008) Reserved Implement Item Code Sequence
>>(0008,0100) Code Value
3rd Row CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.
4th Row CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.
: :
“Requested Code System”

1st Row (0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence
>(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor
2nd Row (0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence
>(0008,0100) Code Value
1st Row (0032,1064) Requested Process Code Sequence
>(0008,0102) Coding Descriptor
“Requested ID, Description”

1st Row (0040,1001) Requested Process ID
2nd Row (0032,1060) Requested Process Descriptor
: :
CS-2 searches the line whose 1st and 2nd row are respectively
identical to those of the “Code Type” and “Body Part Code” sent from
RIS, and converts the 3rd row below into the CS-2 exam tag Serial No.
only when they are identical.
• One RIS Body Code can be converted into 1 ~ 32 (max) exam. tag
keys of CS-2.

How to Create the Conversion Table Conversion table can be created using text editor of Windows or
Microsoft Excel. In the following, procedures using the text editor is
detailed.
1. Input the code system descriptor and body part code value sent from
RIS, and corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. being separated by
comma in one line.
Example: When the code system descriptor is “KCCODE”, and the
code value corresponding to the Chest AP is “100”, input the data in a
line as follows.
KCCODE,100,
• Always use 1 byte alphabet or digit to input.
2. Input the corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. in the 3rd row.
Example:
KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000
3. Repeat the step 1 through 2 for all body part codes of RIS to input
corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No.
Example:
KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000
KCCODE,200,10100100100020000000
KCCODE,300,10100100100030000000
• When the body part code of RIS has several body parts, input the
corresponding CS-2 Exam Tag Serial No. in the 4th row separating
from the 3rd row with comma.
• Maximum 32 CS-2 Exam Tag Serial Nos can be corresponded to
one body part code.
Example:
KCCODE,100,10100100100010000000
KCCODE,200,10100100100020000000
KCCODE,300,10100100100030000000,1010010010040000000,• •
4. Save the created data with an file extension of “.csv” in the super disk.
5. Click [Konica REGIUS] on the CS-2 routine screen to open “Service

Tool (Console)” screen.
6. Click “RIS” of “Input/Output” to open “RIS INFO (Patient/Study)”.
7. Select [Modality Worklist (MWM)] in “Service Class” of “RIS INFO

(Command)” screen, then select “Modality Worklist (MWM)” in the left
menu.
“RIS INFO (Modality Worklist (MWM)” screen will be shown.

16-9
8. Set each item of “Exam Tag” as follows.
Convert Table DICOM (1 to 1)
Convert Source Code Scheduled Code
Ignore 1st Value OFF (no check)
Ignore 2nd Value OFF (no check)
9. Click [Excel File].

“[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen will be shown.
10. Click [Browse. . . ] of “CSV File -> Exam Tag”.

“Open” dialogue will be shown.
11. Select the file name saved in the step 4, then click [Open].
Selected file name will be shown in “CSV File -> Exam Tag” of “[RIS
Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen.
12. Click [Import].

The file will be loaded, and the new conversion table will be created in
the CS-2.
13. Click [YES] of confirmation dialogue for process completion, then click
[Exit] of “[RIS Code] - [Exam Tags] Conversion Table” screen.
Screen switches to “Service Tool (Console)” screen.

0801-55030 C
0502TE

Cs2 Manual de Servicio Ingles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cs2 Manual de Servicio Ingles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cs2 Manual de Servicio Ingles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REGIUS CONSOLE

3RD. EDITION FEB. 2005

No. 26-2, Nishishinjuku 1-chome, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 163-0512, Japan

2. Installing the CS-2

3. Unpacking & Assembling the CS-2

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4. Setting Up the CS-2 Operation Unit

5. Upgrading the CS-2 Program

6. Connecting a CS-2 and REGIUS 170

7. Setting Up the System

8.Setting Up the CS-2

9. Adjusting the Brightness of the CS-2 Operation Unit

II CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

10. Verifying and Backing Up Setup Data

11. Adjustment of Cassette Readers

12. Maintenance & Adjustment

13. Disassembly & Assembly

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

15. Service Tool Screens

IV CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

VI CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1. Precautions for installing and servicing the CS-2

2. Precautions against electric shock

• Precautions against power supply

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

4. Checks and cautions before use of the CS-2

5. Precautions for handling the CS-2 LCD panel

2 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

7. Precautions in operating the CS-2 after an extended period of non-use

9. Precautions when disposing of the product and packing materials.

10. About the device names listed in this manual.

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Safety Alert Symbol

4 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

No. Symbol Meaning of Symbol

1 Danger, Warning or Note.

4 Protective earth (ground)

5 OFF (power: disconnection from the mains)

6 ON (power: connection to the mains)

8 Dangerous voltage. (Indicates that high voltage is used.)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Bodily injury and Death or serious injury DANGER WARNING

6 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Product Name REGIUS Console CS-2

Host Normal 1ch, Backup 1ch

Operational Condition 15 ~ 30°C/40 ~ 80RH% (no condensation)

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.1.2 Bar code reader (Single-Bar code reader) (option)

Bar code reader unit

1-2 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

Scanning Angle(in the case of Secu-

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.2 List of Optional Licenses

Required license Function Product Code (Displayed on the

1-4 CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02

1.3 Equipment Used

CS-2 Installation/Service Manual Version 1.10 2005.02